EP2529368A1 - Improvement for a harmonica provided with an air distributor - Google Patents

Improvement for a harmonica provided with an air distributor

Info

Publication number
EP2529368A1
EP2529368A1 EP11708523A EP11708523A EP2529368A1 EP 2529368 A1 EP2529368 A1 EP 2529368A1 EP 11708523 A EP11708523 A EP 11708523A EP 11708523 A EP11708523 A EP 11708523A EP 2529368 A1 EP2529368 A1 EP 2529368A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
blade
instrument
air
face
comb
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
EP11708523A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Other versions
EP2529368B1 (en
Inventor
Jean-Claude Bibollet
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Individual
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Publication of EP2529368A1 publication Critical patent/EP2529368A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of EP2529368B1 publication Critical patent/EP2529368B1/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G10MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS; ACOUSTICS
    • G10DSTRINGED MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS; WIND MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS; ACCORDIONS OR CONCERTINAS; PERCUSSION MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS; AEOLIAN HARPS; SINGING-FLAME MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS; MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G10D7/00General design of wind musical instruments
    • G10D7/12Free-reed wind instruments
    • G10D7/14Mouth-organs

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an improvement aimed firstly at sealing against air leaks and at optimizing the flow of airflows with the aim of improving the performance of harmonicas of the type possessing a dispenser.
  • slidably mounted air for selectively feeding to a first channel, feeding at least one blown blade and at least one aspirated blade, or to a second channel, also feeding at least one blown blade and at least one aspirated blade, air sucked or the air blown by the player into a mouth hole common to these two adjacent air channels
  • a second object of this invention is to provide a harmonica whose thickness is less than that of harmonicas of this type existing in the prior art and to ensure better ergonomics as much at the mouth as at the level the holding in hand while enjoying the additional compactness of the instrument very appreciable.
  • a third objective of this invention is to propose a disposition of the sound waves adapted to facilitate certain game techniques known under the French terms of alteration, over blowing and suraspirations more known under the English terms of bends, overblows and overdraws allowing obtain intermediate notes between the basic notes, natural, different blades that the instrument contain said "altered" notes being particularly difficult to obtain with the harmonicas of the prior art, which makes them virtually inaccessible to gamers not having a long practice of the instrument.
  • a fourth objective is to propose interior arrangements to the harmonica providing a solution to acoustically limited acoustic performance of the harmonicas of the prior art which, because of their very design, do not make it possible to offer air flow sucked and blown optimized flow and angle of attack relative to the blades necessary to ensure the vibration of the sound waves with force, without delay and the slightest breath of air.
  • the aforementioned internal means integrated in the instrument and not requiring any maintenance being intended to replace the elements generally referred to as valves that the instruments require. of the prior art, these valves being difficult to set up and therefore expensive while remaining fragile and requiring thereby a binding maintenance and periodic replacement.
  • thermoplastics are moreover sensitive to the phenomena of moisture uptake, resulting in limited dimensional variations admittedly, but which are nevertheless disadvantageous when blades and blade holders have to be adjusted relative to one another with a very high accuracy much easier to achieve and maintain over time by using for the blades and the blade holders metals having very close expansion coefficients between them.
  • one of the objectives is therefore to provide directly adaptable arrangements on blade holders of the prior art or on blade holders achievable with the same technologies and using the same materials and production machines as those of the prior art thus achieving high performance without investment for manufacturers and therefore the best price for users.
  • the arrangements of the instrument proposed in this invention therefore constitute a relevant answer to the aforementioned problems encountered in the harmonicas of the prior art and they make it possible to obtain on the one hand a harmonica with a powerful sound thanks to the possibility of being vibrated.
  • the harmonica according to the invention which may be of symmetrical or non-symmetrical external shape, is here positioned in such a way that its mean longitudinal plane Px is arranged vertically, said plane Px being the vertical plane passing substantially to mid-thickness of the instrument and thus passing substantially mid-thickness of the mouth thus passing substantially through the middle of the mouth holes and also passing substantially mid-thickness of the flag so close to the middle of said flag of the instrument.
  • this plane Px constitutes then also the longitudinal plane of general symmetry of the instrument.
  • a main body the peripheral shell of which makes it possible to grip the instrument
  • said main body being constituted by an elongated bell-shaped hollow element whose lower face is open to serve as a flag for the instrument.
  • the upper face of the main body opposite to the flag, constitutes the mouth of the instrument in which are arranged the mouth holes through which the musician insufflates or sucks the air which vibrates sound reeds, or blades sound, of the instrument.
  • the outer shell of said main body may be symmetrical or not with respect to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument and may also be generally symmetrical or not with respect to the vertical plane passing through the mid-length of the instrument,
  • box spring or comb arranged in part at least inside the cavity in the main body.
  • this comb which is or not a monolithic assembly with the main body, are arranged a plurality of air channels whose respective lengths are related to the length of the blades they feed,
  • At least one blade holder held pressed against the corresponding bearing areas of the comb, which bearing zones being formed in particular by the edge of the walls IsĆ©parant laterally the air channels between them.
  • Pressure means for applying the blade plate or plates against the comb and, if appropriate, additional sealing means for avoid air leaks between the different elements: the blade plate (s), the comb and the main body.
  • the two planes passing through the faces of the blade holders bearing against the corresponding faces of the bed base can be parallel to each other or on the contrary be concurrent then constituting a dihedral or the edge common to said two planes is positioned on the side of the flag of the instrument, in the space beyond it and said dihedron is then open towards the mouth of the instrument is on the contrary the two planes are concurrent between them so that they constitute a dihedron whose common edge is positioned on the side of the mouth of the instrument in the space beyond it and said dihedron is then open towards the flag of the instrument.
  • the bed base can be advantageously made in two parts assembled together, for example at the level of the longitudinal longitudinal plane Px of the instrument, by gluing, welding clipping or by any other means and in particular simply by screwing the fixing screws of the blade plates which through said bed base sandwiched between them, this method of assembly providing advantage to keep the possibility of separating at will the two half box springs for easy cleaning.
  • the bed base may advantageously be made of a slightly elastically deformable material in order to fit any deformation of the blade-holding plates, thus avoiding any air leakage between the faces of the blade carriers and the corresponding faces of said bed base.
  • the bed base is a monolithic assembly with the upper cover and / or the lower cover.
  • the different arrangements proposed for the air channels are primarily intended to facilitate the circulation of air flows by avoiding swirling movements that penalize the responsiveness of the sound waves by delaying their vibration and braking when the flow of air.
  • air reverses in the same channel, passing from a blown stream to a sucked flow and vice versa, which is very frequently the case during the game.
  • a second objective is to ensure that the flow of air blown as the air flow aspirated orientation of the air streams in such a way that their angle of attack relative to the sound waves they drive are optimal thus allowing air savings opening the possibility of animating blades more powerful and / or more serious and / or more numerous.
  • At least some of the air channels are conical, their width at the mouth face being greater than their width at their bottom, or end, located on the side of the flag of the instrument and this to increase the pressure of the air blown at the free end of the blown blades.
  • the width of at least some of the air channels, measured in the longitudinal direction of the instrument is, at mid-length of said channels, a value greater than the width of said channels measured at level of the mouth of the instrument and also a value greater than the width measured at the bottom of the channel located on the side of the flag of the instrument.
  • the two lateral flanks of at least some of the air channels are helically shaped to create a double vortex in each of said channels, the two vortices being arranged symmetrically in each channel with respect to the plane passing through the axis. of the two blades concerned.
  • the longitudinal edges of the channel considered generally go away from each other when one moves away from the mouth of the instrument to approach the flag in other words said edges of said channel are closer to each other at the mouth of the mouth of the instrument they are at the level of the zone d end of the channel and vice versa, for the same channel, on the other side of the bed against which rests the other blade holder, the longitudinal edges of said channel are generally approaching one another when the one moves away from the mouth of the instrument to get closer to the flag, in other words said edges of said channel are farther apart from each other at the mouth of the mouth of the instrument. are at the end zone of the canal
  • Such an arrangement also makes it possible to give priority to the ability of the instrument to produce the natural basic notes of each of the blades under the aspirated or blown air streams which correspond to their specificity or, on the contrary, to favor the ability of the instrument to produce so-called "altered" notes that require the sound blades to be solicited under suction or blown air flows in the opposite direction to those corresponding to their specificity.
  • the blade holder supporting the suctioned blades will then be mounted against the face of the bed base in which, for each channel considered the longitudinal edges of said channel are closer to each other at the mouth face than they are near the bottom of the channel and the blade holder supporting the blown blades will then be mounted against the face of the bed in which, for each of the channels considered the longitudinal edges of said channel are further apart from each other at the mouth face than they are near the bottom of the channel.
  • the window through which the oscillating blade concerned is partly covered by a wall arranged obliquely to serve as a deflector, said oblique wall being positioned beyond the area swept by the oscillating portion of the sound blade.
  • the end of the deflector located on the side of the free end of the sound blade concerned is located at a distance from the end of the window located on the side of said free end of the blade, between one quarter and three quarters of the total length of the window through which oscillates said blade.
  • the baffles associated with the extracted sound blades are positioned between the blade holder and the inner face of the hood corresponding while the deflectors associated with the blown blades are positioned inside the air channels arranged in the bed of the harmonica.
  • Each of the deflectors associated with a soundblown blade, and therefore therefore positioned inside the bed base is closed on three of its sides or by walls starting from its vault to join the face of the blade holder against which it is plated either directly by the side walls separating the air channels when it constitutes a monolithic assembly with the bed base.
  • each of the baffles associated with a blade that is sucked up, and therefore thus disposed outside the bed base is closed on three of its sides either by walls directly belonging to said baffle and which join the blade holder to ensure that sealing to the air flows concerned either directly by the members of the counter-comb or cover concerned when said deflector constitutes with one or other of these a monolithic assembly.
  • the deflectors associated with the blown blades are integral with the bed or comb of the harmonica with which they constitute a monolithic assembly.
  • the baffles corresponding to the blown blades are constituted by independent elements, reported therefore, which are either glued, or clipped to the bed base or simply sandwiched between said bed base and the corresponding face of the blade holder concerned .
  • the deflectors associated with the aspirated blades are integral with the corresponding cover of the harmonica with which they constitute a monolithic assembly.
  • the baffles corresponding to the suction blades consist of independent elements, reported therefore, which are either glued or clipped to the corresponding cover or simply sandwiched between said cover and the corresponding face of the blade holder concerned.
  • at least some of the deflectors associated with the suction blades are integral with a counter-comb or counter-bed frame inserted between the blade holder concerned and the inner face of the corresponding cover.
  • deflectors may either constitute with said counter-comb a monolithic assembly or be constituted by independent elements, reported therefore, which are either glued, or clipped on the counter-comb or simply sandwiched between the corresponding inner face of the comb-comb and the corresponding face of the lamellar concerned.
  • the deflectors corresponding to the suction blades and / or the baffles corresponding to the blown blades consist of independent elements fixed to the corresponding blade holder by screwing, riveting, clipping, gluing or by any other removable fastening means or not.
  • the blade holders are of conventional design known to those skilled in the art, they are made from a metal plate in which are cut the windows through which the sound waves oscillate and the baffles are secured to said blade holder with the help of screws, possibly associated with nuts, so as to be removable, in particular to allow the change of the defective vibrating blades.
  • the conventional fastening rivets sound blades are therefore advantageously replaced by screws taking the sound blade concerned sandwiched between the blade holder and the insert element constituting the deflector which thus ensures the attachment of the blade concerned sound against the corresponding face of the blade holder.
  • This type of assembly thus makes it possible to consider the easy and rapid assembly of said deflectors on all types of conventional blade-holders simply by replacing the original fastening rivet of the sound blade with a screw associated with a corresponding threaded deflector or equipped with an attached nut that allow to remove said deflectors selectively for some blades or for all blades according to the preferences of the harmonica player.
  • the deflectors corresponding to the aspirated blades are replaced by a simple deflector plate extending in the longitudinal direction of the instrument from the most serious blade to the highest blade of the instrument.
  • Side flag of the instrument, along its length, the base of the baffle plate is kept pressed against the outer face of the blade holder concerned to prevent air streams from passing between these two bearing faces.
  • the plate is then bent away from the blade as the mouth of the instrument is approached. located outside the space swept by the sound waves during their oscillations.
  • the camber of said plate and the width of this plate, measured in the mouthpiece direction of the instrument are of course calculated in such a way that the longitudinal edge of this plate-deflector is located below the free end of the blades. so that it thus covers only partially said blades substantially under the same conditions of distances as those described above for the deflectors.
  • the curved plate does not necessarily have walls arranged perpendicularly to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument the objective being to constitute a simple springboard so that the air streams arriving from the flag leap over a portion of the area of the blades disposed between their free end and the attachment area of the blade to better focus on the free end zone of the blade where their efficiency will be optimal.
  • This plate-deflector because of its simplicity of realization of course has advantages over the aforementioned deflectors individualized for each blade which are therefore more expensive to produce and especially longer to set up. .
  • each of the air circulation channels feeds at least one blown blade and an aspirated blade.
  • the two blades served by the same air channel are disposed in line on either side of the respective blade carrier and their respective longitudinal axes are coplanar with the longitudinal axis of said air channel while the oscillating free parts of said two sound waves stretch in diametrically opposite directions with respect to each other.
  • the suction blade is fixed against the outer face of the blade holder and against the face of the blade holder oriented on the side of the corresponding cover of the harmonica while the blown blade is fixed against the face of said blade holder pressed against the bed base.
  • each of the two blades can be fixed and held pressed against the blade holder either by welding, gluing, riveting or even better with the aid of one or more screws.
  • one or more screws pass through each of the two baffles associated with the two blades concerned as well as the blade holder and the bead of the two blades so that a single screw or possibly two screws are sufficient to ensure the assembly and the holding in position of said blades and said baffles relative to the blade holder.
  • Such an arrangement proves very easy and very quick assembly and therefore very economical while offering the great advantage of being easily removable as well for the effective cleaning of the instrument for change easy of a failing sound blade.
  • the aforementioned deflectors may be made of metal as well as thermoplastic material or thermosetting material.
  • baffles When the baffles are attached parts fixed to the blade holder with screws they can be advantageously tapped to allow direct screwing of the corresponding screw.
  • said deflectors are advantageously made of a slightly elastically deformable material so that, under the clamping pressure exerted by the fixing screw, they can deform slightly to fit perfectly the face of the holder. blade against which they are pressed and so as to avoid any air passage between said parts. Furthermore, given this slight elastic deformation by creep of the deflector, it is possible to achieve through said deflector a hole of a diameter slightly smaller than that of the fixing screw so that it is thus braked so that it will not be unintentionally unscrewed by the vibrations generated by the instrument.
  • the material selected for the production of the deflectors is too flexible to provide sufficient strength by direct screwing of the fastening screw in the deflector said screw can then advantageously be associated with a conventional metal nut which may be partially at least drowned in a housing of appropriate shape arranged in said deflector.
  • the baffles are removable and fixed to the corresponding blade holder by fixing screws and several baffles equipping adjacent sound blades can be advantageously joined together so as to constitute a monolithic assembly avoiding them to move by rotation under the effect of the vibrations generated by the sound blades while also offering the advantage of a cost more interesting than when they are each independent and therefore produced individually.
  • the deflector in collaboration with the corresponding assembly screw, advantageously constitute an effective means of fixing an inserts strip cut in a flexible and resistant material to form an opposing sealing valve. to the air inlets, through the window concerned, in the opposite direction to that corresponding to the specificity of the blade.
  • the width and the length of this leaflet are greater than the corresponding dimensions of the window concerned so as to that the periphery of said blade can come to bear directly on the face of the blade holder to ensure a satisfactory seal.
  • the assembly screw and the baffle thus sandwich between them both the sound blade concerned, the blade holder and the valve leaflet described above.
  • the valve as described above constitutes a single monolithic assembly with the deflector of the opposite blade.
  • This very advantageous embodiment is applicable when the blades sucked and blown are connected in pairs being arranged in line on either side of the blade holder concerned their respective longitudinal axes being coplanar with the longitudinal axis of the air channel unique that serves them.
  • at least some of the pairs of sound blades may therefore be associated with a deflector covering a portion of the length of the window of the blade carrier through which the first sound blade oscillates, which is either of the suction blade type. either of the blown blade type.
  • the deflector is extended by a thin flexible blade extending in the opposite direction to the free end of the sound blade of which it constitutes the baffle and this flexible blade constitutes the sealing valve of the second sound blade fed by the air channel concerned.
  • the length and the width of the flexible blade are greater than the dimensions of the window through which oscillates this second sound blade which is of the opposite type to the first blade, so respectively either a blown blade or an aspirated blade.
  • the baffle and the thin blade constituting the valve may advantageously be produced, in particular by molding, at the same time and in the same material to then constitute a single-component monolithic assembly as well as being made in two-material injection from two different materials. but nevertheless compatible with each other.
  • the material selected for producing the valve leaflet and, if appropriate, for producing the baffle may advantageously be of the thermoplastic type by selecting a material having the appropriate characteristics in terms of flexibility, resistance to tearing and tearing. alternating bending, anti-adhesion, and elastic memory.
  • the baffles advantageously comprise a lug projecting from their bearing surface against the blade holder, said lug coming from housed in a correspondingly shaped hole made in the blade holder to oppose any inadvertent rotation of the deflector concerned.
  • the deflector associated with the blown blade and / or the associated deflector the suction blade has a small anti-rotation pin protruding from its bearing surface against the blade holder, said pin being housed in the thickness of the blade holder in the window in which oscillates the blade opposite to that for which it plays the role of deflector.
  • the thickness of at least one of the blade carriers that comprises the harmonica is advantageously degressive continuously or by palliating serious blades acute blades and consequently, the height of at least one of the side faces of the window through which oscillates the lowest blade of said blade carrier is greater than the height of the corresponding lateral face of the window through which oscillates the highest blade of said blade holder.
  • the harmonica according to the invention comprises a comb in which is arranged a plurality of walls delimiting air circulation channels feeding two blade holders arranged on either side of the mean longitudinal plane ( Px) of the harmonica each of said blade holder supporting a plurality of sound vibrating blades of the same type, drawn or blown, positioned in correspondence with the aforementioned air circulation channels.
  • the longitudinal axes of the two sound waves, one of the blown type and the other type sucked, fed by the common channel concerned are advantageously coplanar in a plane disposed perpendicularly to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument.
  • a sliding air distributor intended to selectively direct the air blown or sucked by the player towards one or the other of two air circulation channels fed by a mouth hole common to said two air channels, each of which can in turn supply at least one blown blade and at least one aspirated blade.
  • the two aforementioned air circulation channels fed by said common mouth hole are arranged side by side, being separated from each other by a separating wall disposed perpendicularly to the longitudinal plane. average Px.
  • One end of said partition wall abuts against the relevant face of the first blade holder while the other end of said partition wall bears against the corresponding face of the second blade holder.
  • the sliding air distributor moves in axial translation in the longitudinal direction of the instrument to move from its first position, in which it conceals the entrance of the second air circulation channel and directs the air flows to the first channel feeding at least one blade of the first blade holder and at least one blade of the second blade holder, to its second position in which it conceals the inlet of the first air flow channel and directs the flow of air to the second channel feeding at least one blade of the first blade carrier and at least one blade of the second blade carrier.
  • the air distributor is of the pushing type and is automatically returned to its maximum output position of the body of the harmonica by the return means and the player must therefore exert a bearing on the corresponding control member to bring it from its first extended position to its second retracted position.
  • the air distributor is of the pulling type and it is automatically returned to its maximum retracted position in the harmonica by the return means and the player must therefore exercise a pulling on the corresponding control member to bring it from its first retracted position to its second extended position.
  • the harmonica according to the invention comprises means that are directly accessible from the outside without requiring dismantling of the instrument, making it possible to adjust directly by hand using a wheel or with the aid of of a tool prestressing the means ensuring automatic return to the non-output position of the sliding air distributor if it is of the pushing type or in the retracted position of said distributor if it is of the pulling type and so as to easily adapt said prestressing to wishes of the player.
  • the air distributor is in the general shape of a scale consisting of two longitudinal elements arranged substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis of the instrument interconnected by transverse elements. each associated with a mouth hole of its own.
  • each of the transverse elements disposed substantially parallel to the mouth face of the instrument comprises in the vicinity of its two lower free edges small returns arranged projecting from said face so that the extreme edge of said returns is farther from the mouth of the instrument than is the extreme edge of the wall separating two adjacent channels of air circulation fed by a common mouth hole.
  • These small protruding returns are intended to provide a seal against side air leakage by forming a baffle when they bear against the corresponding face of the upper part of the partition wall separating two adjacent channels fed by the same mouth hole.
  • the above-mentioned transverse elements of the air distributor are generally profiled prismatic shape and the width, measured in the longitudinal direction of the 'instrument, said prismatic elements is generally degressive as one moves away from their face closest to the flag of the instrument to get closer to the mouth face of the instrument and each of the two side walls of the mouth hole and / or the comb against which the corresponding face of said transverse element bears is of shape and inclination substantially complementary to those of the corresponding faces of said transverse elements in such manners as said surfaces; can marry each other to ensure an optimal seal against air leaks.
  • At least some of said parts may advantageously be covered with a slightly flexible coating and elastically deformable even be constituted in part or in whole of a slightly elastically deformable material.
  • the upper end portion of the comb, or bed base constituted by the upper edge of the walls separating between them two adjacent air circulation channels fed by two different mouth holes is located closer to the face of the mouth of the instrument that is the lower face of the mouthpiece element in the upper face of which are formed the mouth of the instrument holes and the upper part of the partition walls mentioned above has come s nesting in a housing of complementary shape arranged in the corresponding lower part of said mouthpiece member.
  • the latter are in fact constituted by a simple sliding plate in which holes are arranged which are placed opposite the channels concerned, said plate being arranged perpendicular to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument flow flows air both blown and sucked is very disturbed by the perpendicular faces it encounters and weakens it strongly and make it swirling, forcing the player to compensate by forcing its action which is uncomfortable and which especially excludes the possibility to achieve pianissimo requiring a very low airflow thus reducing the possibility of expressiveness of the player.
  • the mouthpiece element in the upper face of which are implanted the inlet faces of the mouth holes is secured to the comb by means arranged inside the harmonica and which are directly accessible when the instrument covers were removed.
  • the harmonica according to the invention comprises a jaw-shaped comb open towards the mouth of the instrument whose conicity of the faces is complementary to the conicity of the corresponding faces of the comb also. conical in this embodiment so that said corresponding faces are therefore parallel in pairs, and each of the two blade holders of the instrument is sandwiched between the face of the comb and the corresponding face of the counter-comb.
  • the aforementioned thrust means consist of a blade flexible or a flexible rod of round section or any other shape extending in the longitudinal direction of the instrument coming to dock with the comb itself and / or the covers or the peripheral shell of the instrument.
  • each of the air circulation channels feeds at least two blown blades and two aspirated blades and the four blades served by the same air channel are arranged head to tail on both sides.
  • the other of the respective blade holder and their respective longitudinal axes are arranged parallel to each other on either side of the plane passing through the longitudinal axis of the channel, the oscillating free parts of said two sound blades stretching in two opposite directions; one with respect to the other.
  • the harmonica according to the invention comprises openings arranged through at least one cover, said openings being positioned at the level of the oscillating free part of the aspected sound strips concerned, in particular for the low suction blades of the instrument that require a large air supply often penalized by the prior arrangements in which said aspirated blades are trapped at the bottom of the cul de sac represented by the hood concerned.
  • FIGS. 1 to 23 correspond to a first embodiment of FIG. a harmonica according to the invention.
  • FIGS. 24 and 25 are enlarged partial views showing a second embodiment of the air circulation channels and of the air distributor respectively in the two extreme positions, recessed and outlet that can occupy said sliding air distributor,
  • FIGS. 26 and 27 are partial enlarged views showing a third embodiment of the air circulation channels and the air distributor respectively in the two extreme positions, driven in and out that can occupy said sliding air distributor,
  • Figures 28 and 29 are enlarged partial views showing a fourth embodiment of the air flow channels and the air distributor respectively in the two extreme positions, recessed and output that can occupy said sliding air distributor,
  • FIGS. 30 and 31 are enlarged partial views showing a fifth embodiment of the air circulation channels and the air distributor respectively in the two extreme positions, recessed and outlet that can occupy said sliding air distributor,
  • FIG. 32 corresponds to perspective views of the preferred embodiment shown in FIGS. 28 and 29,
  • FIG. 33 shows different views and different sections of a harmonica according to the invention, the faces of the combs against which the blade holders rest are parallel to each other and of which said blade holders are equipped with attached deflectors each secured to said blade holder by means of a screw and a nut which furthermore ensure the fastening and the plating of the corresponding sound blade against the face of the blade holder concerned,
  • FIGS. 34 to 37 show another embodiment of a harmonica according to the invention comprising two blade holders and whose body and mouth constitute a single monolithic assembly.
  • FIGS. 38 to 50 show another embodiment of a harmonica according to the invention comprising a single blade holder supporting all the aspirated blades and all the blown blades. Detailed description of several embodiments
  • the harmonica 1 comprises: a mouthpiece element 2 in the outer face of which open the mouth holes 200 by which the harmonicist sucks or insufflates air that oscillates the sound waves of the instrument, each of the mouth holes 200 serves two air circulation channels 30 and 31 each feeding at least one blown sound blade and at least one aspirated sound blade,
  • openings 100 are arranged at least in the lateral face of the hoods 10.
  • the air distributor 6 moves by axial translation in the longitudinal direction of the instrument to move from its first position, in which it conceals the entry of the second air circulation channel 31 and communicates the mouth hole 200 concerned with the first channel 30 feeding at least one blade of the first blade carrier 4 and at least one blade of the second 5, in its second position in which it conceals the entrance of the first air channel 30 and communicates said mouth hole 200 with the second channel 31 also supplying at least one blade of the first door -lames 4 and at least one blade of the second blade holder 5,
  • Return means here constituted by a torsion spring 11 ensure the automatic return of the air distributor 6 in the extended position as soon as the user stops exerting pressure on the control member of said distributor 6.
  • An elastically deformable damping element 12 constituting a stop in the retracted position at the maximum of the air distributor 6 is interposed between said distributor and the face concerned of the comb 7 while a second elastically deformable damper 13 forming a stop in the extended position of the air distributor 6 is interposed between the distributor 6 and the relevant face of the mouthpiece member 2.
  • the mouthpiece element 2 is secured to the comb 7 by two knurled nuts 14, operable by hand without requiring the use of a tool, said knurled nuts being positioned inside the body of the harmonica not to constitute roughness on the mouth face of the instrument as is the case with the assemblies of the prior art whose screw heads disposed in the mouth face are often aggressive to the lips.
  • the harmonica according to the invention has thin walls 700 and 800 partially covering the windows through which flow of air to animate the sound waves.
  • the window of the blade holder 4 through which oscillates the suction blade 400 is covered over more than half of its length by a thin wall 800 disposed between the inner face of the corresponding cap and the blade holder supporting said blade 400.
  • the thin wall 800 which is positioned beyond the space swept by the aspirated blade 400 as it oscillates constitutes a deflector intended as much to direct the air flows towards the free end portion of the blade as to to oppose the leakage of air sucked or blown between the longitudinal edges of said sound blade and the corresponding edges of the relevant window arranged in the blade holder thereby rendering superfluous the installation of additional sealing devices, referred to as valves which equip the so-called chromatic harmonicas of the prior art.
  • a blade-deflector 700 positioned beyond the space swept by the blown blade 500 and also extending over more than half the length of the window concerned has been disposed to Inside the air circulation channel concerned and it is here a monolithic assembly with the comb 7 itself. It is important to note that one of the particular objectives of the original design of the harmonica according to the invention is to obtain an instrument that can be quickly completely dismounted without tools such as a key screwdriver or clamp necessary with the harmonicas of the prior art. .
  • the blade holders are not secured to the comb by screwing according to the conventional method, but they are sandwiched between the internal faces of the comb and the corresponding outer faces of the comb and on the other hand the screws for securing the mouthpiece element 2 are knurled in order to be actuated by hand while in the heads of the fastening screws of the hoods 10 are provided slots of a width greater than one millimeter and a half which allow either to train them by screwing or unscrewing with the help of a thumbnail or to train them with a simple coin that everyone has at the bottom of his pocket.
  • Such an arrangement has multiple advantages for the user who can thus easily access directly to the sound blades for both cleaning and maintenance or for a last minute adjustment before entering the scene.
  • the arrangement of the blade holders 4 and 5 has been reversed with respect to the conventional arrangement in which, when the instrument is in play position the blade holder supporting the suction blades is disposed in the lower part of the instrument while the blade holder supporting the blown blades is disposed in the upper part of the instrument while in the harmonica shown in these views, when the instrument is in play position, the blade holder 4 supporting the suction blades 400 is disposed in the upper part of the instrument while the blade holder 5 supporting the blown blades 500 is disposed in the lower part of the instrument. .
  • the inverted arrangement in which the blade holders 4 and 5 are implanted here makes it possible to greatly facilitate the evacuation directly to the outside of the instrument of saliva and micro-detritus whereas with the conventional arrangement those they find themselves trapped in the cul-de-sac formed by the bottom of the canal from which they can not escape to because of the closed area at acute angle constituted by the fixed part of the suction blade arranged in the lower part of the channel concerned.
  • the proposed inverted arrangement allows said waste to be easily discharged to the outside through the window of the blade holder in which oscillates the free portion of the blown blade concerned which is located at the bottom of the instrument and this evacuation to the outside is all the more effective because it is provided by the self-cleaning effect conjugate gravity, blown air flow and oscillations of the blown blade.
  • FIG. 17 groups together different views and sections illustrating a particular embodiment of the blade holders whose areas in which the windows are made through which the sound waves oscillate are of decreasing thickness in steps when going from the serious blades to sharp blades.
  • the thickness e1 is greater than the thickness e4 of said blade carriers measured at the sharp blades.
  • the thinning above-mentioned does not concern the part of the blade holder located on the side of the face mouthpiece of the instrument, which part here retains its full thickness e1 to form a straight beam.
  • Figures 18 and 19 show exploded perspective the harmonica shown in Figures 1 to 23.
  • Figures 20 to 23 show in more detail the particular design of the mouthpiece element 2 and the distributor 6 corresponding to the embodiment illustrated in the preceding figures.
  • the air distributor 6 occupies its first position, said outlet at the maximum, and for each of the mouth holes that the harmonica comprises the element 60 of said distributor both muzzle the inlet of the channel 31 and directs the air flows towards the channel 30 by gradually diverting them to said channel 30 with the least loss of strength and speed of said flows through the curvilinear inclined shape convex side of its flanks being placed in the extension of the corresponding concave curvilinear inclined flanks of the transverse element 201 concerned separating two contiguous mouth holes 200.
  • FIG. 22 and the corresponding enlarged view 23 show the path of the air flows when the harmonicist presses on the control knob of the air distributor 6 bringing it into its second position, said retracted, in which the transverse element 60 is positioned so that it blocks the inlet of the channel 30 and directs the air flow to the channel 31.
  • the transverse element 60 Due to the symmetrical shape of its inclined lateral faces in general dihedral shape open towards the flag of the instrument, the transverse element 60 is of generally triangular cross section and its shape is therefore generally prismatic three-sided over its entire length and furthermore each of said transverse members 60 is associated with a single mouth hole of its own.
  • each of the two lateral faces of each of the transverse elements 60 is inclined at the angle ā‡ with respect to the plane passing through the longitudinal axis of the channel concerned, said plane being otherwise perpendicularly disposed. in the longitudinal plane Px of general symmetry of the instrument.
  • the two inclined lateral faces are of convex curvilinear shape complementary with the corresponding concave curvilinear bearing faces of the mouthpiece element so that when these faces are in contact with each other, they marry to the maximum to guarantee a perfect airtightness thus avoiding parasitic air leaks.
  • the angle ā‡ open towards the mouth of the instrument, is greater than 10 Ā° (ten degrees) preferably greater than 15 Ā° (fifteen degrees) and in particular greater than 20 Ā° (twenty degrees)
  • each of the transverse elements 60 disposed substantially parallel to the mouth face, has at its two lower edges small returns 600 and 600 in prominence by relative to said lower face so that the extreme edge of said returns is further away from the mouth face of the instrument than is the extreme edge of the wall separating between them two adjacent flow channels of Air supplied by a common mouth hole 200.
  • Each of said returns 600 is extended over the entire length of the two lower side edges of said element 60 to form a sealing lip which is wedged against the corresponding face of the upper part of the wall separating two air circulation channels fed by the same mouth hole.
  • the relevant sealing spoiler 600 is housed in a rabbet of complementary shape to said spoiler arranged in the upper part of said partition wall so as to provide a seal maximum effect by baffles against parasitic air leaks.
  • the ends of the walls separating two neighboring channels fed by two different mouth holes are nested in slots of complementary shape fitted in the face rearward of the mouthpiece member 201 and, for this purpose, the ends of said walls are situated at a distance d from the mouth face which is less than the distance D separating said mouth face from the upper end of the dividing walls. between them two air channels 30 and 31 fed by the same mouth hole.
  • the wall separating between them two channels 30 and 31 fed by a common mouth hole is thicker than the wall separating between two channels fed by two different mouth holes and this in the to have a sufficient width to be able to develop in the upper part of the thick wall the aforementioned sealing rabbet.
  • This difference in thickness of said walls is also reflected in the fact that the distance separating the adjacent longitudinal edges of two adjacent blades fed by the same mouth hole is greater than the distance separating the two contiguous longitudinal edges of two adjacent blades fed by two different mouths.
  • Figures 24 to 29 are partial cross-sections showing further embodiments of the transverse members 201 of the mouthpiece member 2 and the transverse members 60 of the air distributor 6.
  • Each embodiment is illustrated by a figure showing the position occupied by said elements 201 and 60 when said air distributor occupies its extended position and by another figure in which said air distributor occupies its retracted position.
  • These embodiments differ from the embodiment shown in the preceding figures in that the contact faces between the mouthpiece element 2 and the transverse elements 60 are flat, but they all have in common the interest of having transverse elements.
  • 60 of generally shaped shape and whose width, measured in the longitudinal direction of the instrument, is generally degressive as one moves away from their face closest to the flag of the instrument to get closer to their face located closest to the mouth of the instrument.
  • the planes passing through the lateral faces of said transverse elements 60 constitute a dihedron open towards the flag of the instrument according to the average angle respectively, ā‡ which amounts to saying that the planes passing through the inclined lateral faces 601, 601 located opposite each other of two neighboring transverse elements 60 are a dihedral also of respective value ā‡ , ā‡ but which is open towards the mouth of the instrument.
  • the inclined lateral faces of two neighboring transverse elements therefore constitute a hopper effectively directing the air flows towards the selected air circulation channel and this as well when the air distributor 6 occupies its "outā€ position as its position "
  • This hopper-shaped configuration of the side faces 601 of the transverse members 60 of the air distributor 6 is further reinforced in its efficiency by the inverted hopper-shaped configuration of the inclined flanks 2010,2010 of the corresponding mouth hole 200. whose planes here constitute a dihedral angular value ā‡ open towards the flag of the instrument.
  • the inclination of the lateral faces 601, 601 of the transverse elements 60 of the air distributor 6 is substantially identical to that of the lateral faces 2010,2010 of the transverse elements 201 of the mouthpiece element 2, which allows, on the one hand, optimally widening the passage taken by the sucked or blown air flows arranged between the mouth face and the underside of the air distributor 6 and secondly optimizing the flow of said flows by creating the less possible turbulence and the least cavitation phenomena unlike that experienced by the air flows in the harmonicas of the prior art whose corresponding arrangements include changes in direction at right angles which result in significant loss of speed and forcibly air flows and therefore ultimately by a longer response time or responsiveness in the oscillation of the blades.
  • FIGS. 26 and 27 show an embodiment in which the lateral faces of the transverse elements 201 of the mouthpiece element 2 arranged perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the instrument comprise recesses with recesses of dimensions complementary to the shapes and dimensions of the corresponding lateral faces of the transverse elements 60 of the air distributor 6 so that when the air distributor 6 occupies its fully retracted position or its fully extended position, said respective lateral faces come into close contact with one another against the another marrying as well at their respective inclined lateral faces as at the level of the upper horizontal facet of the transverse elements 60 of the air distributor.
  • These recesses, or steps, thus constitute transverse baffles guaranteeing an optimal seal against parasitic air leakage and thanks to these close contacts between said elements 201 and 60 both in the horizontal sliding plane of the distributor 6 and in inclined planes according to the lateral facets concerned.
  • FIGS. 30 and 31 show an alternative embodiment in which the lateral faces 602 of the transverse elements 60 of the distrubutor 6 have a double curvature, the lower part of which is closest to the horn is convex while the upper part is closest to the horn. mouthpiece is concave.
  • the two mean planes passing through the inclined lateral faces of the transverse elements 60 of the distributor 6 constitute a dihedral of angular value ā‡ open towards the flag of the instrument while the two mean planes passing through the inclined lateral faces of the transverse elements 201 separating two contiguous mouth holes are concurrent and constitute a dihedral of angular value ā‡ open towards the mouth of the instrument.
  • FIG. 32 shows two perspective views of the mouthpiece element 2 and of the air distributor 6 corresponding to the embodiment illustrated by FIGS. 28 and 29. It should be noted that the configurations described above in correspondence with FIGS. 28 to 31, on the one hand, have the advantage of a very reduced translational travel of the air distributor 6 to move from its extended position to its retracted position and vice versa and, on the other hand, the advantage of guaranteeing in all respects the race of said distributor a permanent seal between two neighboring air channels fed by two different mouth holes.
  • each of the transverse elements 60 is constantly in contact with the corresponding lower face of the mouthpiece member 2 thus avoiding any air passage very detrimental between two neighboring channels powered by two different air holes as is the case with the harmonicas of the prior art whose windows arranged through the blade constituting the air distributor moves a channel of air to the neighboring channel fed by another mouth hole thereby inadvertently communicating said channels when the air distributor is halfway.
  • Figure 33 shows a particular embodiment in which the faces of the comb against which bear the blade holders are parallel to each other.
  • 33a is a cross-section of FIG. 33 according to the RR mark with localized detachments of the spoiler 701 making it possible to see the fastening screw heads of the deflectors 16.
  • Figure 33b is a front view of a portion of the blade holder 5.
  • Each of the sound blades is secured to the corresponding blade holder by being sandwiched between the face of said blade holder and an insert member constituting a deflector 15, 16 secured to the blade holder by a screw and a nut.
  • the comb comprises a spoiler 701 partially covering at least the head of said screw while the corresponding cap 10 cover him the nut which, thus, can not escape him either.
  • the comb comprises a second spoiler 702 partially covering at least the head of the screw concerned while a spoiler 82 partially covering at least the nut is formed in an attached element 800 held pressed against the blade holder 4 by one of the screws ensuring the fixing and the plating of the two blade holders 4 and 5 against the corresponding faces of the comb 7.
  • FIG. 33 shows that in this embodiment the comb occupies a position that is off-center in the lateral direction with respect to the mouthpiece and therefore with respect to the mean longitudinal plane Px even though said mouth as well as the outer faces of the two covers are arranged symmetrically with respect to said mean longitudinal plane Px.
  • This off-center arrangement of the blade-holders beneficially exploits the fact that the blade-holder 4 supporting all the aspirated blades of the instrument imposes to have more space between the inner face of the corresponding cap and the outer face of the blade-holder 4.
  • the face of the comb 7 against which rests the blade holder 4 supporting the suction blades 400 is therefore positioned at a distance D2 from said mean longitudinal plane Px less than the distance D1 at which the face of the comb 7 against which presses the blade holder 5 supporting the blown blades 500.
  • the baffles 15 associated with the suction blades are positioned outside the comb and therefore disposed between the outer face of the blade holder 4 and the inner face of the bonnet concerned while the baffles 16 of the blown blades are arranged inside them. of the air circulation channel concerned.
  • the deflectors 15 associated with the suction blades are configured in the form of a closed element over at least a portion of the length of its sides by lateral sealing walls which come to join the corresponding face of the blade carrier 4 while being in position.
  • said upper face of the deflector 15 is advantageously of convex shape in the longitudinal direction of the channel concerned so that it can at the same time marry at best the arched shape of the sounding blade in motion and to present an outer face with rounded shapes in order to to penalize and disturb as little as possible the flow of the sucked air streams that run along said deflectors 15 before rushing into the window through which oscillates the sound blade concerned.
  • the deflectors 16 associated with the blown blades are positioned inside the channels arranged in the comb and their width corresponds to the width of said channels. It is the side walls separating the channels between them which ensure the lateral sealing and the internal deflectors 16 are thus reduced to a wall disposed outside the space swept by the sound wave concerned during its oscillations.
  • the baffles 15 and 16 cover the blade attachment area as well as the fixed part of the blades with which they are associated and they extend towards the free end of said blades sucked and blown in such a way that their end is located respectively at a distance Da from the end of the window adjoining the free end of the aspired sound blade concerned and at a distance Ds from the end of the window adjoining the free end of the concerned blown sound blade.
  • the distance Da being less than the total length La of the window in which the aspired sound blade oscillates concerned as well as the distance Ds is less than the total length Ls of the window in which the respective blown sound wave oscillates.
  • the value of the distance Da is advantageously between one-third and two-thirds of the value of La and the value of the Ds distance is advantageously between one third and two thirds of the value of Ls.
  • the value of the distance Da is advantageously between one-quarter and three-quarters of the value of La and the value of the distance Ds is advantageously between one-quarter and three-quarters of the value of Ls.
  • outer deflectors 15 relating to the suction blades can be grouped together in a single plate held pressed against the outer face of the blade holder 4 supporting the blades sucked by the screws ensuring the assembly and fixation of the or blade holders against the corresponding face or faces of the comb 7.
  • FIGS. 34 to 37 show another embodiment of a harmonica according to the invention, of which the two figures 34 and 35 are respectively front and side views of the mounted harmonica whereas FIG. showing the assembly of the different pieces constituting this harmonica.
  • the covers and the mouth face constitute a monolithic assembly configured as a bell-shaped peripheral shell 18 open on the instrument's side and having on the opposite face constituting the mouth face of the mouthpiece.
  • the instrument the mouth holes 200 by which the harmonicist sucks or blows air which vibrates the sound strips sucked 4 or blown 5 through the channels of circulation of air flows.
  • An opening arranged in the upper part of one of the faces of the shell 18 allows the introduction of the air distributor 6 inside the shell 18.
  • the comb thus already supporting the blade holder is introduced inside the hull 18 and then slidably placed in the direction of the mouth, its good positioning being guaranteed by positioning and guiding means, not shown here, made inside the hull 18 collaborating with additional arrangements made on the comb and / or against the comb 8.
  • said counter-comb comprises ribs 80 arranged in the field relative to the faces of the blade-holders 4 and 5 which chords 80 are positioned at the right of the walls of separation of the channels by slipping between the sound waves concerned.
  • each of the two blade holders 4 and 5 only supports blades of the same type which are aspirated blades 400 for the first blade holder 4 and blades 500 blasted for the second blade carrier
  • all the blades of the same type as the harmonica according to the invention comprises are mounted on the same blade holder and this arrangement of the blades makes it possible to advantageously reduce the overall thickness of the instrument since the comb 7 as well therefore, the blade holders and the counter-comb 8 which it supports can advantageously be mounted in an off-center position with respect to the plane PX of symmetry of the shell.
  • the comb 7 as well as the blade holders 4,5 and the counter-comb 8 that it supports are off-center in the lateral direction with respect to the mean longitudinal plane Px passing through the mid-thickness of the instrument. at the mouth and the mid-thickness of the instrument at the flag, the face of the comb 7 against which rests the blade holder 4 supporting the aspirated blades 400 being positioned closer to said plane Px that does not is the face of the comb 7 against which rests the blade holder 5 supporting the blown blades 500 which is also to say that the face of the comb 7 supporting the blade holder 4 of the suction blades 400 is positioned at a distance of the inner face of the corresponding cap greater than the distance at which the face of the comb 7 supporting the blade holder 5 of the blown blades 500 is located relative to the inner face of the corresponding cap.
  • the ribs 80 of the counter-comb 8 located on the sides of the suctioned blades are lower than are the corresponding members located on the side of the blades sucked and to ensure a better rigidity in particular in longitudinal and transverse bending, side blown blades the ends of said frames are advantageously interconnected by a transverse bar 81 located beyond the space swept by said blown blades.
  • each of the two channels that can be selectively supplied by the air distributor and each containing a suction blade and a blown blade are arranged symmetrically relative to each other with respect to the plane Px mentioned above and that consequently these two channels are separated from each other by a wall extending in the longitudinal direction of the harmonica, the median plane of said wall being parallel and generally even coplanar with the plane Px.
  • each of the channels is closed on three of its four sides since side walls arranged perpendicularly to the plane Px ensure the separation between a pair of channels fed by the same mouth hole and the pair of neighboring channels fed by the hole mouthpiece next.
  • This earlier concept consisting in juxtaposing two channels in the direction of the thickness of the instrument results in an addition of the travel dimensions of the ends of the sound waves to which is added in addition the thickness of the medial partition wall and this accumulation dimensions results in a substantial thickness of the instrument which is penalizing for the grip.
  • the two blades, one sucked and the other blown, contained in a channel 30 fed when the air distributor 6 occupies its first position are arranged vis-Ć - screw one of the other on both sides of the plane Px of general symmetry of the instrument, in the same way as the other two blades one sucked and the other blown, contained in the contiguous channel 31 fed when the air distributor 6 occupies its second position, are also arranged vis-Ć -vis one another.
  • the air circulation channels are thus closed both on their two lateral faces by partition walls arranged parallel to each other and positioned perpendicularly to the plane Px of general symmetry of the instrument.
  • FIGS. 38 to 50 show another embodiment of a harmonica according to the invention, in which all the extracted sound blades 211 and all the blown sounding blades 212 are supported by the same blade holder 21.
  • Said aspirated blades 211 and blowers 212 are arranged head to tail in a row on either side of the blade holder 21 to which they are secured in pairs by a common screw passing through the internal deflector 27, the heel of the blown blade 212, the blade holder 21, the heel of the sucked blade 211 and the outer baffle 26 to be screwed into a nut embedded in the outer baffle 26.
  • the respective longitudinal axes of the sucked blade 211 and the blown blade 212 are arranged parallel, and even coplanarly, with the longitudinal axis of the single air channel 220 which serves them and the free oscillating parts of said sound blades stretch. in two diametrically opposite directions with respect to each other.
  • the single blade holder 21 is arranged obliquely with respect to the mean longitudinal plane Px which cuts said blade holder 21 in an area between the two opposite free ends of the sucked blade 211 and the worst blown blade 212 the most serious fed both by a common channel 220. It should be noted that the single blade holder 21 disposed here obliquely with respect to the plane Px could equally well be arranged parallel to the plane Px without thereby departing from the scope of the invention.
  • the air circulation channels 220 arranged in the comb 22 do not pass through the entire thickness of said comb so that they are closed by a wall extending in the longitudinal direction of the harmonica, said longitudinal wall comb thus constituting one of the two outer longitudinal faces of the peripheral shell of the instrument.
  • the air channels are advantageously of substantially conical shape and therefore of generally degressive section when moving away from the mouth of the nozzle. instrument to get closer to the pavilion.
  • This configuration results in an inclination of the average longitudinal axis of the air circulation channels with respect to the plane Px according to an angular value ā‡ such that the overall mean plane of the face of the mouth of the instrument is not arranged perpendicular to the average longitudinal plane Px according to the conventional mode of the prior art but inclined by an angular value advantageously substantially equal to ā‡ relative to said plane perpendicular to the plane Px and the value of the angle ā‡ is advantageously between ten degrees and 30 degrees.
  • the arrangement of the blade holder and the comb can be reversed with respect to the arrangement shown in FIGS. 38 to 50 in which, when the harmonica occupies its play position, the plane Px being then disposed substantially horizontally, the The single blade holder 21 is disposed above the comb 22 in which the channels 22 are arranged. In the inverted arrangement, not shown in these drawings, when the harmonica occupies its play position, the plane Px then being arranged substantially horizontally, the single blade holder 21 is then disposed below the comb 22 in which the channels 22 are arranged. . As shown in FIGS.
  • the blade holder 21 is not secured to the comb by screws which must be disassembled in order to separate it from the comb as is the case for the harmonicas of the prior art but is taken sandwiched between said comb 22 and the cover 23 acting as a presser exerting a support on the one hand at least at the longitudinal edge of the blade holder extending on the side of the mouth 24 and at the edge longitudinal of said blade holder extending along the roof and secondly at a plurality of support members 230 integral with the cover 23 arranged substantially perpendicular to the mean longitudinal plane Px.
  • Each of the support members constitutes a reinforcing rib of the cover 23 and is in the form of a wall whose median plane is advantageously arranged coplanar with the median plane of the corresponding wall 221 separating between them two contiguous channels 220 comb 22.
  • the pressure means tending to bring the cover 23 closer to the comb 22 consist here of screws 37 passing through said cover, as well as, where appropriate, a corresponding frame 230, then the blade holder 21 to be screwed into the comb 22.
  • the screws can be arranged in the opposite position, their heads then being located on the side of the comb 22 and their rods coming to screw into the cover 23.
  • Each of these screws may also be replaced by a pair consisting of a female screw associated with a male screw whose respective heads open out of the cover 23 and the comb 22.
  • the harmonica according to the invention comprises at least one pressure screw 37 implanted in the part of the instrument between the two planes arranged perpendicularly to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument and passing through the longitudinal axis of the instrument. air circulation channel feeding the most serious blade of the instrument and the other by the longitudinal axis of the channel feeding the highest pitch of the instrument.
  • the longitudinal axis of at least one of the clamping screws of the pressure caps is positioned at a distance from the mouth face lower than the distance separating said mouth face from the bottom of the channel of air circulation 220 feeding the worst blade of the instrument.
  • the air flow channels 220 that includes said comb 22 are divided into five groups.
  • Each of said groups here consists of four contiguous channels corresponding to two contiguous mouth holes.
  • the longitudinal axes of said channels 220 are advantageously parallel to each other while said longitudinal axes 220 of one of said groups of channels are divergent with respect to the longitudinal axes of the channels of another group of channels. adjacent channels so that the partition wall separating the two contiguous air channels belonging to two neighboring groups widens as one moves away from the mouth face to approach the face of the roof of the roof. instrument.
  • the straight line passing through the longitudinal axis of said screws passes through a wall 221 separating between them two adjacent air circulation channels 220 whose respective longitudinal axes are divergent when the one moves away from the mouth face of the instrument to get closer to the flag of the instrument and the longitudinal axis of said clamping screws of the presser cover 23 is positioned at a distance from the mouth face of the mouthpiece. the instrument below the distance from said mouth face at which is the bottom of the shorter of the two air channels 220 adjacent the wall in which is implanted the clamping screw concerned.
  • FIG. 39 shows an enlargement of the corresponding zone of FIG. 38 illustrating the embodiment detail of the device for adjusting the prestressing of the means ensuring the automatic return to the extended position of the air distributor 25 when the player does not press on the end of said distributor constituting its control button.
  • These return means here consist of a helical compression spring 252 associated with a device for adapting the prestressing to the wishes of the player consisting of a bush 250, internally threaded, crimped inside said button and in which a threaded stud 251 can move axially by simply screwing or unscrewing, which can be operated directly from the outside, without the need to dismantle the instrument, using a suitable drive tool introduced through a hole made through the button control of the air distributor 25.
  • the aspirated sound blades 211 are associated with a deflector 26 covering a portion of the length of the window of the blade holder 21 through which the sound blade concerned oscillates.
  • the aforementioned deflector is extended by a thin flexible valve blade 260 extending in the opposite direction to the free end of the sound blade which it is the deflector and this flexible blade is the sealing valve of the blown sound blade 212 powered by the same air channel 220.
  • the length and the width of the above-mentioned soft blade 260 are greater than the dimensions of the window through which the blown sound wave oscillates 212, as shown, on the one hand, by the corresponding discontinuous lines on the valve lamellae corresponding to the powered channels 220. by the mouth-holes 3 and 4 as well as the localized tear-offs effected on the leaf-valves 260 of the air channels corresponding to the mouth-hole 5.
  • the deflectors 26, 27 and the corresponding thin strip 260, 270 constituting the valve may advantageously be produced, in particular by molding, at the same time and in the same material, to then constitute a single-component monolithic assembly as well as being made by dual injection molding. -material from two different materials but nevertheless compatible with each other.
  • the deflectors 26 and 27 advantageously comprise a small anti-rotation pin, respectively 261 and 271, protruding with respect to their bearing face against the blade holder 21, said pin being received in the thickness of the blade holder in the window in which oscillates the blade opposite to that for which each of said deflector plays its role of deflector.
  • FIG. 44 shows that the assembly, against the corresponding face of the blade holder, of the bass blades having an excess thickness 100 at their free end constituting a ballast weight has been inverted compared to the assembly of the prior art. shown in Figure 43 wherein said low blades are mounted such that said extra thickness of the blades 100 and the redan that it constitutes are located on the face of the blade opposite to that which is pressed against the blade holder which causes a disruption of the laminar flow of air flows animating said blades.
  • the proposed reverse arrangement is illustrated in FIG. 44 in which the face of the blade comprising the excess thickness 100 is oriented against the blade holder and the back of the blade is therefore perfectly smooth, which allows the air streams to flow. without disturbance by sliding on the end zone of the free portion of the blades without encountering obstacles that would create swirls prompt to cause twisting and therefore twisting of the blade which is very detrimental to its life and otherwise not very harmonious on the musical level.
  • recesses 101 can be advantageously made in the blade holder. These recesses 101 may be made both at the end of the window concerned and on at least part of its longitudinal edges and in the face of the blade holder against which is plated the sound blade concerned.
  • FIG. 46 is an enlarged view of the corresponding zone of FIG. 45 showing an embodiment of an air distributor 25, at least some of whose faces comprise sealing baffles 253 intended to oppose leaks of unwanted air between said distributor 25 and / or the comb 22 and / or the mouth member 24 and / or the hood 23.
  • These baffles 253 formed in the faces of the air distributor 25 extend in the longitudinal direction of the instrument and they consist of steps, and / or ribs and / or grooves of dimensions and complementary shapes perfectly adjusted to steps and / or ribs and / or complementary grooves formed in the corresponding faces of the mouth member 24 and / or the comb 22 and / or covers 23 against which slides said distributor.
  • Figures 48 to 50 illustrate an alternative embodiment of the harmonica having a single blade holder shown in the previous figures.
  • At least some of the windows through which oscillate the audible blades 38 and blown 39 are partially covered by special baffles spoilers 35 and 36 arranged head to tail on both sides of the blade holder, said baffles constituting each a boss advantageously of convex shape in the longitudinal direction and in the transverse direction for constituting a spoiler or deflector aerodynamic forms allowing the air streams to pass, with the least possible disturbance, over the area in which are positioned both the rivet or the blade fixing screw and the vertical portion of the end of each of the windows located on the side of the fixed part of the sound blade concerned.
  • the protruding rivets fastening the blades to the blade holder as well as the vertical rectangular bottom and thus very little aerodynamic constituted by the edge of the windows represent as many obstacles opposing a fluid and continuous flow of air streams.
  • Each of these particular deflectors consists of a curvilinear wall convex at least in the longitudinal axial direction of the sound blades concerned, said wall being positioned beyond the space swept by the blades during their maximum oscillations, and it covers continuously both part of the sound blade pressed against the same face of the blade holder as it respects 38 and 39, and therefore also the corresponding portion of the window which is associated with said blade, and a part of the window through which oscillates the sound blade fixed on the opposite face of the blade holder, respectively 39 and 38.
  • each of the two spoilers extends continuously in the longitudinal direction of the two sound waves over an overall length such that, from the two opposite ends of the windows concerned, the two opposite ends of each of said deflectors-spoilers are at distances, respectively da1 and ds1 for the outer deflector 35 and da2 and ds2 for the inner deflector 36, less than three quarters of the length, respectively Da and Ds, of the windows through which the sound waves sway concerned 38 and 39.
  • the deflectors extend over an overall overall length such that each of the distances da1 and ds1 for the outer deflector 35 and da2 and ds2 for the inner baffle 36 are less than two-thirds of the length, respectively Da and Ds, of the windows through which the sound waves concerned 38 and 39 oscillate.
  • the internal spoilers 36 are positioned inside the air channels and they can be attached and fixed to the blade holder by any means such as for example a screw as shown in Figures 48 to 50, but these internal spoilers can also advantageously constitute a monolithic assembly with the comb while being independent of the blade carrier.
  • the outer spoilers are arranged between the outer face of the blade holder and the corresponding inner face of the cover 23 and they can also be reported and be fixed to the blade holder by any means such as for example a screw as shown in FIGS. to 50 but they can also advantageously be joined together to form a profiled element according to the required convex transverse profile, said element extending substantially in the longitudinal direction of the instrument being optionally connected to the frame of the cover 23.
  • baffles spoilers are here fixed together by a common screw which also ensures the attachment of the sucked blade 38 and the blown blade 39 against the corresponding faces of the blade holder sandwiched between said blades .
  • Each of the two spoilers 35 and 36 has an anti-rotation pin which fits precisely in the window of the blade sucked for the inner spoiler 36 and in the window of the blown blade for the outer spoiler 35
  • Figures 48 to 50 show that at least some of the sound waves of the instrument are associated with at least one if not two fins, respectively 33 and 34, arranged on either side of the single blade holder 21. These two fins are asymmetric tapered cross section and their respective longitudinal axes extend in the longitudinal direction of the instrument substantially parallel to the plane Px.
  • the first fin 33 is disposed inside the relevant channel through which it passes right through the longitudinal direction of the instrument and its leading edge located closest to the mouth is positioned substantially opposite the free end of the suction blade 38 while the second fin 34 is implanted on the other side of the single blade holder, so between the outer face of the blade holder and the inner face of the cover.
  • This second fin 34 is implanted such that its leading edge located closest to the flag of the instrument is positioned substantially opposite the free end of the blown blade 39.
  • Each of these two fins has a slightly convex face which we will call intrados and a second face whose convexity is much more accentuated than we will call extrados, said extrados being oriented in the direction of the blade holder both for the inner fin 33 and for the outer fin 34.
  • FIG. 49 shows the operation of these arrangements when the player blows in the air circulation channel associated with the sucked blade 38 and the blown blade 39.
  • the fin 33 divides the flow of initial blown air into two streams: a main stream and a secondary stream.
  • the main flow passes between the underside of the fin 90 and the wall of the comb constituting the hood and closing the channels on their third side, This main air flow follows an almost straight path to reach by the shortest path the part free of blown sound blade 39.
  • the second flow considered as the secondary flow, bypasses the upper surface of the inner fin 33, passing between said extrados and the corresponding inner face of the blade carrier and between the extrados and the convex face of the deflector. internal spoiler 36. Due to the greater convexity and consequently the greater length of the extrados compared to that of the intrados, this secondary flow therefore follows a longer path than that which follows the main flow which imposes an increase velocity in the area of the extrados to the air streams of the secondary flow entrained in their race by the air streams of the main flow.
  • FIG. 50 shows the principle of operation of these arrangements when the player sucks in the air circulation channel associated with the aspirated blade 38 and the blown blade 39.
  • a burette 28 of triangular curvilinear section serving as an aerodynamic springboard for the air streams sucked by the flag which are thus mainly directed between the underside of the outer fin 34 and the corresponding inner face of the cover 23 and then follow a path almost rectilinear to reach by the shortest path the free part of the aspired sound blade 38.
  • a minority of sucked air threads passes between the extrados of the outer fin 34 and the corresponding outer face of the blade holder and between said extrados and the convex face of the outer spoiler-deflector 35. Again, because of the greater convexity and consequently the greater length of the extrados compared to that of the intrados, this minority flow follows a longer path than that which follows the main flow from of the flag which imposes an increase of speed in the area of the extrados to the air streams of the secondary flow entrained in their race by the air streams of said main stream coming from the flag of the instrument.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Pinball Game Machines (AREA)
  • Electrophonic Musical Instruments (AREA)
  • Air-Flow Control Members (AREA)

Abstract

The harmonica according to the invention comprises: a main hollow body, the front surface of which is open so as to act as a bell while the opposite rear surface is bored with mouthpiece holes (200); a plurality of walls that define air flow channels (30, 31); and two blade holders (4, 5) on which a plurality of vibrating sound blades are mounted, wherein said sound blades are positioned in correlation with the above-mentioned air flow channels. Said harmonica is characterized in that it comprises an air distributor (6) enabling the selective supply of air from a single mouthpiece hole (200) to two air flow channels (30, 31) that are placed side by side.

Description

Perfectionnement pour harmonica Ć©quipĆ© d'un distributeur d'air Ā Improvement for harmonica equipped with an air distributor
Domaine technique et objet de l'invention Technical field and object of the invention
La prƩsente invention concerne un perfectionnement visant tout d'abord Ơ assurer l'ƩtanchƩitƩ face aux fuites d'air ainsi qu'Ơ optimiser les Ʃcoulements des flux d'air dans le but d'amƩliorer les performances des harmonicas du type possƩdant un distributeur d'air montƩ coulissant permettant d'envoyer sƩlectivement vers un premier canal, alimentant au moins une lame soufflƩe et au moins une lame aspirƩe, ou vers un second canal, alimentant lui aussi au moins une lame soufflƩe et au moins une lame aspirƩe, l'air aspirƩ ou l'air soufflƩ par le joueur dans un trou d'embouchure commun Ơ ces deux canaux d'air adjacents The present invention relates to an improvement aimed firstly at sealing against air leaks and at optimizing the flow of airflows with the aim of improving the performance of harmonicas of the type possessing a dispenser. slidably mounted air for selectively feeding to a first channel, feeding at least one blown blade and at least one aspirated blade, or to a second channel, also feeding at least one blown blade and at least one aspirated blade, air sucked or the air blown by the player into a mouth hole common to these two adjacent air channels
Un second objectif de cette invention est de proposer un harmonica dont l'Ć©paisseur soit infĆ©rieure Ć  celle des harmonicas de ce type existant dans l'art antĆ©rieur et ce afin d'assurer une meilleure ergonomie autant au niveau de l'embouchure qu'au niveau de la tenue en main tout en bĆ©nĆ©ficiant de surcroĆ®t d'une compacitĆ© de l'instrument trĆØs apprĆ©ciable. A second object of this invention is to provide a harmonica whose thickness is less than that of harmonicas of this type existing in the prior art and to ensure better ergonomics as much at the mouth as at the level the holding in hand while enjoying the additional compactness of the instrument very appreciable.
Un troisiĆØme objectif de cette invention est de proposer une disposition des lames sonores propre Ć  faciliter certaines techniques de jeu connues sous les termes franƧais d'altĆ©ration , de sursoufflage et de suraspirations plus connues sous les termes anglais de bends , overblows et overdraws permettant d'obtenir des notes intermĆ©diaires entre les notes basiques, naturelles, des diffĆ©rentes lames que comportent l'instrument lesdites notes "altĆ©rĆ©es" se rĆ©vĆ©lant particuliĆØrement difficiles Ć  obtenir avec les harmonicas de l'art antĆ©rieur ce qui les rend de ce fait quasi inaccessibles aux joueurs n'ayant pas une longue pratique de l'instrument. Un quatriĆØme objectif est de proposer des amĆ©nagement internes Ć  l'harmonica apportant une solution face au rendement sonore limitĆ©, sur le plan acoustique, des harmonicas de l'art antĆ©rieur qui, en raison de leur conception mĆŖme, ne permettent pas d'offrir aux flux d'air aspirĆ©s et soufflĆ©s un Ć©coulement et un angle d'attaque optimisĆ©s par rapport aux lames nĆ©cessaires pour assurer la mise en vibration des lames sonores avec force, sans dĆ©lai et dĆØs le moindre souffle d'air. Les moyens internes susmentionnĆ©s intĆ©grĆ©s Ć  l'instrument et n'exigeant aucune maintenance Ć©tant destinĆ©s Ć  remplacer les Ć©lĆ©ments rapportĆ©s gĆ©nĆ©ralement dĆ©signĆ©s sous le terme de valves que nĆ©cessitent les instruments de l'art antĆ©rieur , ces valves se rĆ©vĆ©lant dĆ©licates Ć  mettre en place et donc coĆ»teuses tout en restant fragiles et exigeant de ce fait une maintenance contraignante et un remplacement pĆ©riodique . En effet si les harmonicas de l'art antĆ©rieur souffrent d'un mauvais rendement sur le plan aĆ©raulique, et donc par voie de consĆ©quence sur le plan sonore, cela est dĆ» Ć  la fois aux fuites d'air trĆØs pĆ©nalisantes ainsi qu'Ć  la conception peu Ć©laborĆ©e des canaux d'air qui imposent aux flux d'air de brusques changements de direction rendant difficile et laborieuse la mise en vibration simultanĆ©e de plusieurs lames sonores nĆ©cessaire pour produire des accords aussi bien que la mise en vibration de lames sonores suffisamment puissantes pour gĆ©nĆ©rer un son acoustique suffisamment fort pour pouvoir Ć©viter de devoir recourir Ć  un systĆØme d'amplification de son . A third objective of this invention is to propose a disposition of the sound waves adapted to facilitate certain game techniques known under the French terms of alteration, over blowing and suraspirations more known under the English terms of bends, overblows and overdraws allowing obtain intermediate notes between the basic notes, natural, different blades that the instrument contain said "altered" notes being particularly difficult to obtain with the harmonicas of the prior art, which makes them virtually inaccessible to gamers not having a long practice of the instrument. A fourth objective is to propose interior arrangements to the harmonica providing a solution to acoustically limited acoustic performance of the harmonicas of the prior art which, because of their very design, do not make it possible to offer air flow sucked and blown optimized flow and angle of attack relative to the blades necessary to ensure the vibration of the sound waves with force, without delay and the slightest breath of air. The aforementioned internal means integrated in the instrument and not requiring any maintenance being intended to replace the elements generally referred to as valves that the instruments require. of the prior art, these valves being difficult to set up and therefore expensive while remaining fragile and requiring thereby a binding maintenance and periodic replacement. Indeed, if the harmonicas of the prior art suffer from a poor performance on the aeraulic plan, and therefore consequently on the sound level, this is due to both the very penalizing air leaks as well as the poor design of the air channels which force sudden changes of direction in the airflow making it difficult and laborious to simultaneously vibrate several sound waves necessary to produce chords as well as to vibrate sufficiently powerful sound waves to generate an acoustic sound strong enough to avoid having to resort to a sound amplification system.
Concernant plus particuliĆØrement les porte-lames, si il existe dĆ©jĆ  certains perfectionnements visant Ć  rĆ©duire les fuites d'air inopinĆ©es entre les bords de la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille la partie libre d'une lame sonore et les bords de ladite lame ces perfectionnements font appel a des porte-lames spĆ©ciaux rĆ©alisĆ©s par moulage qui exigent un matĆ©riel sophistiquĆ© et un haut niveau de prĆ©cision pour leur rĆ©alisation ce qui se traduit par des coĆ»ts de production Ć©levĆ©s. De plus, comme ces technologies font systĆ©matiquement appel Ć  l'utilisation d'un matĆ©riau, gĆ©nĆ©ralement du type thermoplastique, trĆØs diffĆ©rent des mĆ©taux utilisĆ©s pour la rĆ©alisation des lames sonores elles-mĆŖmes, il rĆ©sulte de cette hĆ©tĆ©rogĆ©nĆ©itĆ© de grandes disparitĆ©s dans le comportement et dans les coefficients de dilatation entre les lames sonores et le porte-lames ce qui est Ć©videmment trĆØs prĆ©judiciable aux performances finales. Il faut savoir en outre que la plupart des matiĆØres thermoplastiques sont par ailleurs sensibles au phĆ©nomĆØnes de reprise d'humiditĆ© entraĆ®nant des variations de cotes limitĆ©es certes mais qui sont nĆ©anmoins pĆ©nalisantes lorsque lames et porte-lames doivent ĆŖtre ajustĆ©s les uns par rapport aux autres avec une trĆØs grande prĆ©cision beaucoup plus facile Ć  atteindre et Ć  conserver dans le temps en utilisant pour les lames et les porte-lames des mĆ©taux prĆ©sentant entre eux des coefficients de dilation trĆØs voisins . Concerning more particularly blade holders, if there are already certain improvements aimed at reducing unplanned air leakage between the edges of the window through which oscillates the free part of a sound blade and the edges of said blade these improvements use special molding blades which require sophisticated equipment and a high level of precision for their production, which results in high production costs. Moreover, since these technologies systematically involve the use of a material, generally of the thermoplastic type, very different from the metals used for the production of the sound strips themselves, it results from this heterogeneity of large disparities in the behavior and in the coefficients of expansion between the sound blades and the blade holder which is obviously very detrimental to the final performances. It should also be known that most thermoplastics are moreover sensitive to the phenomena of moisture uptake, resulting in limited dimensional variations admittedly, but which are nevertheless disadvantageous when blades and blade holders have to be adjusted relative to one another with a very high accuracy much easier to achieve and maintain over time by using for the blades and the blade holders metals having very close expansion coefficients between them.
Concernant l'amĆ©lioration des performances de l'harmonica selon l'invention , pour ce qui se rapporte aux porte-lames eux-mĆŖmes, l'un des objectifs visĆ©s est donc de proposer des amĆ©nagements directement adaptables sur des porte-lames de l'art antĆ©rieur ou sur des porte-lames rĆ©alisables avec les mĆŖmes technologies et faisant appel aux mĆŖmes matĆ©riaux et aux mĆŖmes machines de production que ceux de l'art antĆ©rieur permettant ainsi d'obtenir des performances Ć©levĆ©es sans investissement pour les fabricants et donc au meilleur prix pour les utilisateurs . Les amĆ©nagements de l'instrument proposĆ©s dans cette invention constituent donc une rĆ©ponse pertinente aux problĆØmes susmentionnĆ©s rencontrĆ©s dans les harmonicas de l'art antĆ©rieur et ils permettent d'obtenir d'une part un harmonica au son puissant grĆ¢ce Ć  la possibilitĆ© de mise en vibration de lames sonores plus Ć©paisses que celles de l'art antĆ©rieur et ils permettent d'autre part d'abaisser le seuil de mise en vibration des lames sonores qui devient alors possible dĆØs le moindre souffle d'air ce qui permet une plus grande expressivitĆ© de jeu s'Ć©tendant du pianissimo au fortissimo . PrĆ©alablement, pour faciliter la description et la comprĆ©hension du prĆ©sent document nous convenons tout d'abord que l'embouchure constituant la partie de l'instrument en contact avec la bouche du musicien constitue la partie supĆ©rieure de l'instrument tandis que la partie opposĆ©e, le pavillon, par laquelle sortent les sons Ć©mis constitue la partie infĆ©rieure de l'instrument. Regarding the improvement of the performance of the harmonica according to the invention, as regards the blade holders themselves, one of the objectives is therefore to provide directly adaptable arrangements on blade holders of the prior art or on blade holders achievable with the same technologies and using the same materials and production machines as those of the prior art thus achieving high performance without investment for manufacturers and therefore the best price for users. The arrangements of the instrument proposed in this invention therefore constitute a relevant answer to the aforementioned problems encountered in the harmonicas of the prior art and they make it possible to obtain on the one hand a harmonica with a powerful sound thanks to the possibility of being vibrated. sound blades thicker than those of the prior art and they allow on the other hand to lower the threshold of vibration of the sound waves which then becomes possible at the slightest breath of air which allows a greater expressiveness of game ranging from pianissimo to fortissimo. Beforehand, to facilitate the description and the understanding of this document, we first agree that the mouthpiece constituting the part of the instrument in contact with the musician's mouth constitutes the upper part of the instrument while the opposite part, the flag, through which emitted sounds is the lower part of the instrument.
Nous convenons par ailleurs que l'harmonica selon l'invention, qui peut ĆŖtre de forme extĆ©rieure symĆ©trique ou non symĆ©trique, est ici positionnĆ© de telle maniĆØre que son plan longitudinal moyen Px est disposĆ© verticalement , ledit plan Px Ć©tant le plan vertical passant sensiblement Ć  mi-Ć©paisseur de l'instrument et passant donc sensiblement Ć  mi-Ć©paisseur de l'embouchure en passant donc sensiblement par le milieu des trous d'embouchure et passant Ć©galement sensiblement Ć  mi-Ć©paisseur du pavillon donc au voisinage du milieu dudit pavillon de l'instrument . Bien sĆ»r dans le cas oĆ¹ toute la partie de l'instrument disposĆ©e d'un cotĆ© dudit plan longitudinal moyen Px est identique Ć  toute la partie de l'instrument disposĆ©e de l'autre cotĆ© de ce plan longitudinal moyen Px , ce plan Px constitue alors Ć©galement le plan longitudinal de symĆ©trie gĆ©nĆ©rale de l'instrument . We further agree that the harmonica according to the invention, which may be of symmetrical or non-symmetrical external shape, is here positioned in such a way that its mean longitudinal plane Px is arranged vertically, said plane Px being the vertical plane passing substantially to mid-thickness of the instrument and thus passing substantially mid-thickness of the mouth thus passing substantially through the middle of the mouth holes and also passing substantially mid-thickness of the flag so close to the middle of said flag of the instrument. Of course, in the case where the entire part of the instrument disposed on one side of said mean longitudinal plane Px is identical to the entire part of the instrument disposed on the other side of this mean longitudinal plane Px, this plane Px constitutes then also the longitudinal plane of general symmetry of the instrument.
Enfin nous convenons d'appeler lames soufflĆ©es les lames fixĆ©es sur la face du porte-lames orientĆ©e du cotĆ© intĆ©rieur des canaux d'air tandis que les lames dites aspirĆ©es seront les lames fixĆ©es contre la face du porte-lames situĆ©e Ć  l'extĆ©rieur des canaux d'air. Dans la prĆ©sente description, nous ne prendrons donc pas en compte le fait que les lames dites soufflĆ©es, ayant comme vocation principale d'entrer en vibration en produisant un son lorsque le joueur souffle dans l'instrument, peuvent dans certaines techniques de jeu, entrer en action mĆŖme lors de l'aspiration . Il en va de mĆŖme pour les lames dites aspirĆ©es qui peuvent entrer en action lors du soufflage dans certaines techniques de jeu qui contraignent occasionnellement les lames Ć  vibrer sous l'action d'un flux d'air de direction contraire Ć  celui pour lequel elles ont Ć©tĆ© conƧues au dĆ©part mais qui reste cependant Ć©videmment leur mode de vibration principal. De la mĆŖme maniĆØre lorsque , pour les porte-lames, le texte mentionne le terme de face d'admission de l'air il s'agit toujours de la face par laquelle l'air entre pour passer au travers de la fenĆŖtre concernĆ©e en entraĆ®nant au passage en vibration la lame correspondante et Ć  contrario, lorsque le texte Ć©voque le terme de face d'Ć©chappement il s'agit de la face par laquelle l'air sort aprĆØs ĆŖtre passĆ© au travers de ladite fenĆŖtre et ce toujours en rĆ©fĆ©rence au type , respectivement aspirĆ© ou soufflĆ©, de la lamelle associĆ©e Ć  la fenĆŖtre concernĆ©e. Finally we agree to call blades bladed blades fixed on the face of the blade holder oriented on the inner side of the air channels while the blades said sucked will be the blades fixed against the face of the blade holder located outside the air channels. In the present description, therefore, we will not take into account the fact that the so-called blown blades, whose main purpose is to enter into vibration by producing a sound when the player blows into the instrument, may in certain game techniques, enter in action even during aspiration. The same applies to so-called aspirated blades that can come into action during blowing in certain game techniques that occasionally force the blades to vibrate under the action of a directional flow of air contrary to that for which they have originally designed, but which, of course, remains their main mode of vibration. In the same way when, for the blade holders, the text mentions the term air intake face, it is always the face through which the air to pass through the window concerned, causing the corresponding blade to vibrate, and conversely, when the text evokes the term exhaust face, it is the face through which the air leaves after being passed to the through said window and this always with reference to the type, respectively sucked or blown, of the lamella associated with the window concerned.
Ceci convenu, l'instrument selon l'invention est constituƩ des ƩlƩments suivants : This agreed, the instrument according to the invention consists of the following elements:
un corps principal, dont la coque pĆ©riphĆ©rique permet la prĆ©hension de l'instrument, ledit corps principal Ć©tant constituĆ© d'un Ć©lĆ©ment creux en forme de cloche allongĆ©e dont la face infĆ©rieure est ouverte pour servir de pavillon Ć  l'instrument. La face supĆ©rieure du corps principal, opposĆ©e au pavillon, constitue la face d'embouchure de l'instrument dans laquelle sont amĆ©nagĆ©s les trous d'embouchure par lesquels le musicien insuffle ou aspire l'air qui met en vibration les anches sonores, ou lames sonores, de l'instrument. La coque extĆ©rieure dudit corps principal peut ĆŖtre symĆ©trique ou non par rapport au plan longitudinal moyen Px de l'instrument et elle peut aussi ĆŖtre globalement symĆ©trique ou non par rapport au plan vertical passant par la mi-longueur de l'instrument, Ā a main body, the peripheral shell of which makes it possible to grip the instrument, said main body being constituted by an elongated bell-shaped hollow element whose lower face is open to serve as a flag for the instrument. The upper face of the main body, opposite to the flag, constitutes the mouth of the instrument in which are arranged the mouth holes through which the musician insufflates or sucks the air which vibrates sound reeds, or blades sound, of the instrument. The outer shell of said main body may be symmetrical or not with respect to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument and may also be generally symmetrical or not with respect to the vertical plane passing through the mid-length of the instrument,
un Ć©lĆ©ment dĆ©nommĆ© sommier ou peigne disposĆ© en partie au moins Ć  l'intĆ©rieur de la cavitĆ© amĆ©nagĆ©e dans le corps principal. Dans ce peigne, qui constitue ou non un ensemble monolithique avec le corps principal, sont amĆ©nagĆ©s une pluralitĆ© de canaux d'air dont les longueurs respectives sont en relation avec la longueur des lames qu'ils alimentent, Ā an element called box spring or comb arranged in part at least inside the cavity in the main body. In this comb, which is or not a monolithic assembly with the main body, are arranged a plurality of air channels whose respective lengths are related to the length of the blades they feed,
- au moins un porte-lames maintenu plaquĆ© contre les zones d'appui correspondantes du peigne, lesquelles zones d'appui Ć©tant constituĆ©es notamment par la tranche des parois IsĆ©parant latĆ©ralement les canaux d'air entre eux. Ā - At least one blade holder held pressed against the corresponding bearing areas of the comb, which bearing zones being formed in particular by the edge of the walls IsĆ©parant laterally the air channels between them.
Plusieurs lames sonores vibrantes, du type anches libres , constituĆ©es de fines lamelles gĆ©nĆ©ralement mĆ©talliques fixĆ©es par l'une de leurs extrĆ©mitĆ©s au porte- lames par tout moyen de fixation tels que notamment rivet, agrafe, vis, colle, point de soudure ou clipsage. Sous l'action combinĆ©e de la force de l'air aspirĆ© ou soufflĆ© par le musicien et de l'Ć©lasticitĆ© en flexion desdites lamelles , l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de ces lamelles peut osciller de part et d'autre d'une position d'Ć©quilibre en passant au travers d'une fenĆŖtre de dimensions trĆØs lĆ©gĆØrement supĆ©rieures amĆ©nagĆ©e au travers de la plaque porte-lames concernĆ©e . Ā Several vibrating sound blades, of the free reed type, consisting of thin generally metal slats secured by one of their ends to the blade holder by any means of attachment such as rivet, staple, screw, glue, welding point or clipping. Under the combined action of the force of the air sucked or blown by the musician and the flexural elasticity of said slats, the free end of these slats can oscillate on either side of a position of equilibrium passing through a window slightly larger dimensions arranged through the plate-bearing concerned.
- Des moyens de pression visant Ơ appliquer la ou les plaques porte-lames contre le peigne et, le cas ƩchƩant , des moyens complƩmentaires d'ƩtanchƩitƩ visant Ơ Ʃviter les fuites d'air entre les diffƩrents ƩlƩments : la ou les plaques porte-lames, le peigne et le corps principal . Pressure means for applying the blade plate or plates against the comb and, if appropriate, additional sealing means for avoid air leaks between the different elements: the blade plate (s), the comb and the main body.
Selon une premiĆØre caractĆ©ristique lorsquze l'harmonica comporte deux porte-lames, les deux plans passant par les faces des porte-lames en appui contre les faces correspondantes du sommier peuvent ĆŖtre parallĆØles entre eux ou au contraire ĆŖtre concourants en constituant alors soit un diĆØdre dont l'arĆŖte commune auxdits deux plans est positionnĆ©e du cotĆ© du pavillon de l'instrument , dans l'espace situĆ© au-delĆ  de celui-ci et ledit diĆØdre est alors ouvert en direction de l'embouchure de l'instrument soit au contraire les deux plans sont concourants entre eux de telle maniĆØre qu'ils constituent un diĆØdre dont l'arĆŖte commune est positionnĆ©e du cotĆ© de l'embouchure de l'instrument dans l'espace situĆ© au-delĆ  de celle-ci et ledit diĆØdre est alors ouvert en direction du pavillon de l'instrument . Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique, pour permettre la rĆ©alisation de canaux associĆ©s Ć  des amĆ©nagements internes tels que des dĆ©flecteurs qui seront dĆ©crits plus loin dans ce document, le sommier peut ĆŖtre avantageusement rĆ©alisĆ© en deux parties assemblĆ©es entre elles, par exemple au niveau du plan longitudinal moyen Px de l'instrument, par collage , clipsage soudage ou par tout autre moyen et notamment simplement par le vissage des vis de fixation des plaques porte-lames qui en traversant ledit sommier le prennent en sandwich entre elles , ce mode d'assemblage offrant l'avantage de garder la possibilitĆ© de sĆ©parer Ć  volontĆ© les deux demi sommiers pour en faciliter le nettoyage . According to a first characteristic when the harmonica comprises two blade holders, the two planes passing through the faces of the blade holders bearing against the corresponding faces of the bed base can be parallel to each other or on the contrary be concurrent then constituting a dihedral or the edge common to said two planes is positioned on the side of the flag of the instrument, in the space beyond it and said dihedron is then open towards the mouth of the instrument is on the contrary the two planes are concurrent between them so that they constitute a dihedron whose common edge is positioned on the side of the mouth of the instrument in the space beyond it and said dihedron is then open towards the flag of the instrument. According to another characteristic, to allow the realization of channels associated with internal arrangements such as deflectors which will be described later in this document, the bed base can be advantageously made in two parts assembled together, for example at the level of the longitudinal longitudinal plane Px of the instrument, by gluing, welding clipping or by any other means and in particular simply by screwing the fixing screws of the blade plates which through said bed base sandwiched between them, this method of assembly providing advantage to keep the possibility of separating at will the two half box springs for easy cleaning.
Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique le sommier peut ĆŖtre avantageusement rĆ©alisĆ© dans un matĆ©riau lĆ©gĆØrement Ć©lastiquement dĆ©formable pour venir Ć©pouser les Ć©ventuelles dĆ©formation des plaques porte-lames en Ć©vitant ainsi toute fuite d'air entre les faces des porte-lames et les faces correspondantes dudit sommier . According to another characteristic, the bed base may advantageously be made of a slightly elastically deformable material in order to fit any deformation of the blade-holding plates, thus avoiding any air leakage between the faces of the blade carriers and the corresponding faces of said bed base.
Selon une autre caractƩristique d'un mode particulier de rƩalisation , le sommier constitue un ensemble monolithique avec le capot supƩrieur et/ou le capot infƩrieur . According to another characteristic of a particular embodiment, the bed base is a monolithic assembly with the upper cover and / or the lower cover.
Les diffĆ©rents amĆ©nagements proposĆ©s pour les canaux d'air visent avant tout Ć  faciliter la circulation des flux d'air en Ć©vitant les mouvements tourbillonnaires qui pĆ©nalisent la rĆ©activitĆ© des lames sonores en retardant leur mise en vibration aussi bien que leur freinage lorsque le flux d'air s'inverse dans le mĆŖme canal, en passant d'un flux soufflĆ© Ć  un flux aspirĆ© et inversement, ce qui est trĆØs frĆ©quemment le cas au cours du jeu . Un second objectif visĆ© est d'assurer aux flux d'air soufflĆ©s comme aux flux d'air aspirĆ©s une orientation des filets d'air de telle maniĆØre que leur angle d'attaque par rapport aux lames sonores qu'ils animent soient optimal permettant ainsi des Ć©conomies d'air ouvrant la possibilitĆ© d'animer des lames plus puissantes et/ou plus graves et/ou plus nombreuses . The different arrangements proposed for the air channels are primarily intended to facilitate the circulation of air flows by avoiding swirling movements that penalize the responsiveness of the sound waves by delaying their vibration and braking when the flow of air. air reverses in the same channel, passing from a blown stream to a sucked flow and vice versa, which is very frequently the case during the game. A second objective is to ensure that the flow of air blown as the air flow aspirated orientation of the air streams in such a way that their angle of attack relative to the sound waves they drive are optimal thus allowing air savings opening the possibility of animating blades more powerful and / or more serious and / or more numerous.
Pour ce faire, selon un premier mode de rƩalisation, certains au moins des canaux d'air sont coniques, leur largeur au niveau de la face d'embouchure Ʃtant supƩrieure Ơ leur largeur au niveau de leur fond , ou extrƩmitƩ , situƩe du cotƩ du pavillon de l'instrument et ce de faƧon Ơ augmenter la pression de l'air soufflƩ au niveau de l'extrƩmitƩ libre des lames soufflƩes. To do this, according to a first embodiment, at least some of the air channels are conical, their width at the mouth face being greater than their width at their bottom, or end, located on the side of the flag of the instrument and this to increase the pressure of the air blown at the free end of the blown blades.
Selon un autre mode de rƩalisation, la largeur de certains au moins des canaux d'air, mesurƩe dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument, est, Ơ mi-longueur desdits canaux, d'une valeur supƩrieure Ơ la largeur desdits canaux mesurƩe au niveau de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument et Ʃgalement d'une valeur supƩrieure Ơ la largeur mesurƩe au niveau du fond du canal situƩ du cotƩ du pavillon de l'instrument. According to another embodiment, the width of at least some of the air channels, measured in the longitudinal direction of the instrument, is, at mid-length of said channels, a value greater than the width of said channels measured at level of the mouth of the instrument and also a value greater than the width measured at the bottom of the channel located on the side of the flag of the instrument.
Selon un autre mode de rĆ©alisation les deux flancs latĆ©raux de certains au moins des canaux d'air sont de forme hĆ©licoĆÆdale pour crĆ©er un double vortex dans chacun desdits canaux les deux vortex Ć©tant disposĆ©s symĆ©triquement dans chaque canal par rapport au plan passant par l'axe longitudinal des deux lames concernĆ©es. Dans ce mode de rĆ©alisation pour la premiĆØre face du sommier contre laquelle s'appuie le premier porte- lames les bords longitudinaux du canal considĆ©rĆ© vont globalement en s'Ć©cartant l'un de l'autre lorsque l'on s'Ć©loigne de l'embouchure de l'instrument pour se rapprocher du pavillon autrement dit lesdits bords dudit canal sont plus proches l'un de l'autre au niveau de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument qu'ils ne le sont au niveau de la zone d'extrĆ©mitĆ© du canal et inversement , pour ce mĆŖme canal, sur l'autre face du sommier contre laquelle s'appuie l'autre porte-lames, les bords longitudinaux dudit canal vont globalement en se rapprochant l'un de l'autre lorsque l'on s'Ć©loigne de l'embouchure de l'instrument pour se rapprocher du pavillon autrement dit lesdits bords dudit canal sont plus Ć©loignĆ©s l'un de l'autre au niveau de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument qu'ils ne le sont au niveau de la zone d'extrĆ©mitĆ© du canal According to another embodiment, the two lateral flanks of at least some of the air channels are helically shaped to create a double vortex in each of said channels, the two vortices being arranged symmetrically in each channel with respect to the plane passing through the axis. of the two blades concerned. In this embodiment for the first face of the bed base against which the first blade rests, the longitudinal edges of the channel considered generally go away from each other when one moves away from the mouth of the instrument to approach the flag in other words said edges of said channel are closer to each other at the mouth of the mouth of the instrument they are at the level of the zone d end of the channel and vice versa, for the same channel, on the other side of the bed against which rests the other blade holder, the longitudinal edges of said channel are generally approaching one another when the one moves away from the mouth of the instrument to get closer to the flag, in other words said edges of said channel are farther apart from each other at the mouth of the mouth of the instrument. are at the end zone of the canal
Une telle disposition permet par ailleurs soit de privilƩgier l'aptitude de l'instrument Ơ produire les notes basiques naturelles de chacune des lames sous les flux d'air aspirƩs ou soufflƩs qui correspondent Ơ leur spƩcificitƩ soit au contraire Ơ privilƩgier l'aptitude de l'instrument Ơ produire les notes dites "altƩrƩes" qui nƩcessitent de solliciter les lames sonores sous des flux d'air aspirƩs ou soufflƩs de sens opposƩ Ơ ceux qui correspondent Ơ leur spƩcificitƩ . Ainsi , pour que l'instrument soit avant tout spƩcialisƩ dans la production des notes basiques naturelles , le porte-lames supportant les lames aspirƩes sera alors montƩ plaquƩ contre la face du sommier dans laquelle , pour chacun des canaux considƩrƩ les bords longitudinaux dudit canal sont plus proches l'un de l'autre au niveau de la face d'embouchure qu'ils ne le sont au voisinage du fond du canal et le porte-lames supportant les lames soufflƩes sera alors montƩ plaquƩ contre la face du sommier dans laquelle , pour chacun des canaux considƩrƩ les bords longitudinaux dudit canal sont plus ƩcartƩs l'un de l'autre au niveau de la face d'embouchure qu' ils ne le sont au voisinage du fond du canal . Such an arrangement also makes it possible to give priority to the ability of the instrument to produce the natural basic notes of each of the blades under the aspirated or blown air streams which correspond to their specificity or, on the contrary, to favor the ability of the instrument to produce so-called "altered" notes that require the sound blades to be solicited under suction or blown air flows in the opposite direction to those corresponding to their specificity. Thus, so that the instrument is primarily specialized in the production of natural basic notes, the blade holder supporting the suctioned blades will then be mounted against the face of the bed base in which, for each channel considered the longitudinal edges of said channel are closer to each other at the mouth face than they are near the bottom of the channel and the blade holder supporting the blown blades will then be mounted against the face of the bed in which, for each of the channels considered the longitudinal edges of said channel are further apart from each other at the mouth face than they are near the bottom of the channel.
A l'inverse si l'on souhaite trouver un compromis permettant d'obtenir bien-sĆ»r les notes naturelles des lames mais cependant de faƧon moins stable que dans le montage susmentionnĆ© tout en facilitant par contre l'obtention des notes dites "altĆ©rĆ©es" il suffira de rĆ©aliser un sommier inversĆ© par symĆ©trie par rapport au plan longitudinal moyen Px dudit sommier de telle maniĆØre que pour le porte-lames supportant les lames soufflĆ©es pour chacun des canaux considĆ©rĆ©s les bords longitudinaux dudit canal soient plus proches l'un de l'autre au niveau de la face d'embouchure qu'ils ne le sont au voisinage de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© opposĆ©e du canal et le porte-lames supportant les lames aspirĆ©es sera alors montĆ© plaquĆ© contre la face du sommier dans laquelle , pour chacun des canaux considĆ©rĆ© les bords longitudinaux dudit canal sont plus Ć©cartĆ©s l'un de l'autre au niveau de la face d'embouchure qu' ils ne le sont au voisinage de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© opposĆ©e du canal . Conversely if one wishes to find a compromise allowing to obtain of course the natural notes of the blades but however less stable than in the aforementioned assembly while facilitating the obtaining of the so-called notes "altered" it it will suffice to make a bed base inverted by symmetry with respect to the longitudinal longitudinal plane Px of said bed base so that for the blade holder supporting the blown blades for each of the channels considered the longitudinal edges of said channel are closer to each other at the level of the mouth face that they are in the vicinity of the opposite end of the channel and the blade holder supporting the suctioned blades will then be mounted against the face of the bed base in which, for each of the channels considered the Longitudinal edges of said channel are further apart from each other at the mouth face than they are in the vicinity of the opposite end of the channel.
Enfin .selon une autre caractƩristiques d'un mode de rƩalisation particulier destinƩ Ơ faciliter et Ơ rendre plus confortable la technique de jeu connue de l'homme de l'art sous le terme anglophone de "Tongue blocking" l'axe du trou d'embouchure alimentant la lame la plus aiguƫ de l'instrument est avantageusement situƩ Ơ une distance de l'extrƩmitƩ Finally, according to another feature of a particular embodiment intended to facilitate and make more comfortable the game technique known to those skilled in the art under the English term of "Tongue blocking" the axis of the hole of mouthpiece feeding the sharpest blade of the instrument is advantageously located at a distance from the end
correspondante de la face d'embouchure infƩrieure Ơ la distance Ơ laquelle est positionnƩ l'axe du trou d'embouchure alimentant la lame la plus grave de l'instrument par rapport Ơ l'extrƩmitƩ correspondante de ladite face d'embouchure . corresponding mouth of the lower mouth face to the distance at which is positioned the axis of the mouth hole feeding the most serious blade of the instrument relative to the corresponding end of said mouth face.
Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique, pour certaines au moins des lames sonores que comporte l'harmonica selon l'invention, la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille la lame concernĆ©e est en partie recouverte par une paroi disposĆ©e obliquement pour servir de dĆ©flecteur , ladite paroi oblique Ć©tant positionnĆ©e au-delĆ  de la zone balayĆ©e par la partie oscillante de la lame sonore. L'extrĆ©mitĆ© du dĆ©flecteur situĆ©e du cotĆ© de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame sonore concernĆ©e est situĆ©e Ć  une distance de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© de la fenĆŖtre situĆ©e du cotĆ© de ladite extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame, comprise entre le quart et les trois quarts de la longueur totale de la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille ladite lame . Les dĆ©flecteurs associĆ©es aux lames sonores aspirĆ©es sont positionnĆ©s entre le porte-lames et la face intĆ©rieure du capot correspondant tandis que les dĆ©flecteurs associĆ©s aux lames soufflĆ©es sont positionnĆ©s Ć  l'intĆ©rieur des canaux d'air amĆ©nagĆ©s dans le sommier de l'harmonica. According to another characteristic, for at least some of the sound waves that comprises the harmonica according to the invention, the window through which the oscillating blade concerned is partly covered by a wall arranged obliquely to serve as a deflector, said oblique wall being positioned beyond the area swept by the oscillating portion of the sound blade. The end of the deflector located on the side of the free end of the sound blade concerned is located at a distance from the end of the window located on the side of said free end of the blade, between one quarter and three quarters of the total length of the window through which oscillates said blade. The baffles associated with the extracted sound blades are positioned between the blade holder and the inner face of the hood corresponding while the deflectors associated with the blown blades are positioned inside the air channels arranged in the bed of the harmonica.
Chacun des dĆ©flecteurs Ć  la forme d'un tunnel dont le fond est fermĆ© en cul de sac, l'ouverture du tunnel Ć©tant orientĆ©e du cotĆ© de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame sonore Ć  laquelle ce dĆ©flecteur est associĆ© tandis que la voĆ»te dudit tunnel s'Ć©loigne progressivement du porte-lames, sur lequel sa base est plaquĆ©e, au fur et Ć  mesure que l'on se rapproche de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame sonore Ć  laquelle il est associĆ© . Chacun des dĆ©flecteurs associĆ© Ć  une lame sonore soufflĆ©e, et donc de ce fait positionnĆ© Ć  l'intĆ©rieur du sommier, est donc fermĆ© sur trois de ses cotĆ©s soit par des parois partant de sa voĆ»te pour venir rejoindre la face du porte-lame contre laquelle il est plaquĆ© soit directement par les parois latĆ©rales sĆ©parant les canaux d'air lorsqu'il constitue un ensemble monolithique avec le sommier . De mĆŖme chacun des dĆ©flecteurs associĆ© Ć  une lame aspirĆ©e, et donc de ce fait disposĆ© Ć  l'extĆ©rieur du sommier, est fermĆ© sur trois de ses cotĆ©s soit par des parois appartenant directement audit dĆ©flecteur et qui viennent rejoindre le porte-lames pour assurer l'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© aux flux d'air concernĆ©s soit directement par les membrures du contre-peigne ou du capot concernĆ©s lorsque ledit dĆ©flecteur constitue avec l'un ou l'autre de ceux-ci un ensemble monolithique . Each of the deflectors in the form of a tunnel whose bottom is closed cul de sac, the opening of the tunnel being oriented on the side of the free end of the sound blade to which this deflector is associated while the vault of said tunnel progressively away from the blade holder, on which its base is plated, as one approaches the free end of the sound blade with which it is associated. Each of the deflectors associated with a soundblown blade, and therefore therefore positioned inside the bed base, is closed on three of its sides or by walls starting from its vault to join the face of the blade holder against which it is plated either directly by the side walls separating the air channels when it constitutes a monolithic assembly with the bed base. Likewise, each of the baffles associated with a blade that is sucked up, and therefore thus disposed outside the bed base, is closed on three of its sides either by walls directly belonging to said baffle and which join the blade holder to ensure that sealing to the air flows concerned either directly by the members of the counter-comb or cover concerned when said deflector constitutes with one or other of these a monolithic assembly.
Selon une caractƩristique d'un premier mode de rƩalisation , certains au moins des dƩflecteurs associƩs aux lames soufflƩes sont solidaires du sommier ou peigne de l'harmonica avec lequel ils constituent un ensemble monolithique. Selon une variante de ce mode de rƩalisation les dƩflecteurs correspondants aux lames soufflƩes sont constituƩs d'ƩlƩments indƩpendants , rapportƩs donc ,qui sont soit collƩs , soit clipsƩ au sommier soit simplement pris en sandwich entre ledit sommier et la face correspondante du porte-lames concernƩ . According to a characteristic of a first embodiment, at least some of the deflectors associated with the blown blades are integral with the bed or comb of the harmonica with which they constitute a monolithic assembly. According to a variant of this embodiment the baffles corresponding to the blown blades are constituted by independent elements, reported therefore, which are either glued, or clipped to the bed base or simply sandwiched between said bed base and the corresponding face of the blade holder concerned .
Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique d'un mode de rĆ©alisation , certains au moins des dĆ©flecteurs associĆ©s aux lames aspirĆ©es sont solidaires du capot correspondant de l'harmonica avec lequel ils constituent un ensemble monolithique. Selon une variante de ce mode de rĆ©alisation les dĆ©flecteurs correspondants aux lames aspirĆ©es sont constituĆ©s d'Ć©lĆ©ments indĆ©pendants , rapportĆ©s donc ,qui sont soit collĆ©s , soit clipsĆ©s au capot correspondant soit simplement pris en sandwich entre ledit capot et la face correspondante du porte-lames concernĆ© . Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique d'un autre mode de rĆ©alisation , certains au moins des dĆ©flecteurs associĆ©s aux lames aspirĆ©es sont solidaires d'un contre-peigne ou contre- sommier insĆ©rĆ© entre le porte lames concernĆ© et la face intĆ©rieure du capot correspondant . Ces dĆ©flecteurs peuvent soit constituer avec ledit contre-peigne un ensemble monolithique soit ĆŖtre constituĆ©s d'Ć©lĆ©ments indĆ©pendants , rapportĆ©s donc ,qui sont soit collĆ©s , soit clipsĆ©s au contre-peigne soit simplement pris en sandwich entre la face intĆ©rieure correspondante du contre-peigne et la face correspondante du porte-lamĆ©s concernĆ© . According to another characteristic of an embodiment, at least some of the deflectors associated with the aspirated blades are integral with the corresponding cover of the harmonica with which they constitute a monolithic assembly. According to a variant of this embodiment, the baffles corresponding to the suction blades consist of independent elements, reported therefore, which are either glued or clipped to the corresponding cover or simply sandwiched between said cover and the corresponding face of the blade holder concerned. According to another feature of another embodiment, at least some of the deflectors associated with the suction blades are integral with a counter-comb or counter-bed frame inserted between the blade holder concerned and the inner face of the corresponding cover. These deflectors may either constitute with said counter-comb a monolithic assembly or be constituted by independent elements, reported therefore, which are either glued, or clipped on the counter-comb or simply sandwiched between the corresponding inner face of the comb-comb and the corresponding face of the lamellar concerned.
Selon un autre mode de rĆ©alisation , les dĆ©flecteurs correspondants aux lames aspirĆ©es et/ou les dĆ©flecteurs correspondant aux lames soufflĆ©es constituent avec le porte lames correspondant un ensemble monolithique . Selon un autre mode de rĆ©alisation , les dĆ©flecteurs correspondants aux lames aspirĆ©es et/ou les dĆ©flecteurs correspondant aux lames soufflĆ©es sont constituĆ©s d'Ć©lĆ©ments indĆ©pendants fixĆ©s au porte-lame correspondant par vissage, rivetage, clipsage , collage ou par tout autre moyen de solidarisation dĆ©montable ou non. Selon un mode de rĆ©alisation prĆ©fĆ©rentiel , les porte-lames sont de conception classique connue de l'homme de l'art , ils sont rĆ©alisĆ©s Ć  partir d'une plaque de mĆ©tal dans laquelle sont dĆ©coupĆ©es les fenĆŖtres au travers desquelles oscillent les lames sonores et les dĆ©flecteurs sont solidarisĆ©s audit porte-lames Ć  l'aide de vis .associĆ©es le cas Ć©chĆ©ant Ć  des Ć©crous , de faƧon Ć  pouvoir ĆŖtre dĆ©montables , notamment pour permettre le changement des lames vibrantes dĆ©fectueuses . Dans ce mode de rĆ©alisation , les rivets classiques de fixation des lames sonores sont donc avantageusement remplacĆ©s par des vis prenant la lame sonore concernĆ©e en sandwich entre le porte-lames et l'Ć©lĆ©ment rapportĆ© constituant le dĆ©flecteur qui assure donc ainsi la fixation de la lame sonore concernĆ©e contre la face correspondante du porte-lames . Ce type d'assemblage permet ainsi aussi bien d'envisager le montage facile et rapide desdits dĆ©flecteurs sur tous les types de porte-lames classiques simplement en remplaƧant le rivet originel de fixation de la lame sonore par une vis associĆ©e Ć  un dĆ©flecteur correspondant taraudĆ© ou Ć©quipĆ© d'un Ć©crou rapportĆ© que de permettre de retirer lesdits dĆ©flecteurs sĆ©lectivement pour certaines lames ou pour la totalitĆ© des lames en fonction des prĆ©fĆ©rences de l'harmoniciste . According to another embodiment, the baffles corresponding to the suction blades and / or the baffles corresponding to the blown blades together with the corresponding blade holder a monolithic assembly. According to another embodiment, the deflectors corresponding to the suction blades and / or the baffles corresponding to the blown blades consist of independent elements fixed to the corresponding blade holder by screwing, riveting, clipping, gluing or by any other removable fastening means or not. According to a preferred embodiment, the blade holders are of conventional design known to those skilled in the art, they are made from a metal plate in which are cut the windows through which the sound waves oscillate and the baffles are secured to said blade holder with the help of screws, possibly associated with nuts, so as to be removable, in particular to allow the change of the defective vibrating blades. In this embodiment, the conventional fastening rivets sound blades are therefore advantageously replaced by screws taking the sound blade concerned sandwiched between the blade holder and the insert element constituting the deflector which thus ensures the attachment of the blade concerned sound against the corresponding face of the blade holder. This type of assembly thus makes it possible to consider the easy and rapid assembly of said deflectors on all types of conventional blade-holders simply by replacing the original fastening rivet of the sound blade with a screw associated with a corresponding threaded deflector or equipped with an attached nut that allow to remove said deflectors selectively for some blades or for all blades according to the preferences of the harmonica player.
Enfin selon un autre mode de rĆ©alisation les dĆ©flecteurs correspondant aux lames aspirĆ©es sont remplacĆ©s par une simple plaque-dĆ©flecteur s'Ć©tendant dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument de la lame la plus grave Ć  la lame la plus aiguĆ« de l'instrument . CotĆ© pavillon de l'instrument, sur toute sa longueur , la base de la plaque-dĆ©flecteur est maintenue plaquĆ©e contre la face extĆ©rieure du porte-lames concernĆ© pour Ć©viter que des filets d'air ne passent entre ces deux faces d'appui .La plaque s'incurvet ensuite en s'Ć©loignant du porte-lames au fur et Ć  mesure que l'on se rapproche de l'embouchure de l'instrument de maniĆØre Ć  se situer hors de l'espace balayĆ© par les lames sonores lors de leur oscillations . La cambrure de ladite plaque et la largeur de cette plaque, mesurĆ©e dans le sens embouchure pavillon de l'instrument, sont bien sĆ»r calculĆ©es de telle maniĆØre que le bord longitudinal de cette plaque-dĆ©flecteur se situe en deƧƠ de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre des lames sonores de telle maniĆØre qu'elle ne recouvre donc que partiellement lesdites lames sensiblement dans les mĆŖmes conditions de distances que celles dĆ©crites ci-avant pour les dĆ©flecteurs . Finally, according to another embodiment, the deflectors corresponding to the aspirated blades are replaced by a simple deflector plate extending in the longitudinal direction of the instrument from the most serious blade to the highest blade of the instrument. Side flag of the instrument, along its length, the base of the baffle plate is kept pressed against the outer face of the blade holder concerned to prevent air streams from passing between these two bearing faces. The plate is then bent away from the blade as the mouth of the instrument is approached. located outside the space swept by the sound waves during their oscillations. The camber of said plate and the width of this plate, measured in the mouthpiece direction of the instrument, are of course calculated in such a way that the longitudinal edge of this plate-deflector is located below the free end of the blades. so that it thus covers only partially said blades substantially under the same conditions of distances as those described above for the deflectors.
Contrairement aux dĆ©flecteurs ci avant dĆ©crits, la plaque incurvĆ©e ne comporte pas obligatoirement de parois disposĆ©es perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal moyen Px de l'instrument l'objectif recherchĆ© Ć©tant de constituer un simple tremplin pour que les filets d'air arrivant du pavillon bondissent au dessus d'une partie de la zone des lames disposĆ©es entre leur extrĆ©mitĆ© libre et la zone de fixation de la lame pour mieux se concentrer sur la zone d'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame oĆ¹ leur efficacitĆ© sera optimale . Unlike the deflectors described above, the curved plate does not necessarily have walls arranged perpendicularly to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument the objective being to constitute a simple springboard so that the air streams arriving from the flag leap over a portion of the area of the blades disposed between their free end and the attachment area of the blade to better focus on the free end zone of the blade where their efficiency will be optimal.
Cette plaque-dĆ©flecteur , de par sa simplicitĆ© de rĆ©alisation prĆ©sente bien sĆ»r des avantages par rapport aux dĆ©flecteurs susmentionnĆ©s individualisĆ©s pour chaque lame qui sont de ce fait plus coĆ»teux Ć  produire et surtout plus long Ć  mettre en place . . Ā This plate-deflector, because of its simplicity of realization of course has advantages over the aforementioned deflectors individualized for each blade which are therefore more expensive to produce and especially longer to set up. .
Selon un autre mode de rĆ©alisation prĆ©fĆ©rentiel , chacun des canaux de circulation d'air alimente au moins une lame soufflĆ©e et une lame aspirĆ©e . Les deux lames desservies par un mĆŖme canal d'air sont disposĆ©es en ligne de part et d'autre du porte-lames concernĆ© et leurs axes longitudinaux respectifs sont coplanaires avec l'axe longitudinal dudit canal d'air tandis que les parties libres oscillantes desdites deux lames sonores s'Ć©tirent dans des directions diamĆ©tralement opposĆ©es l'une par rapport Ć  l'autre . La lame aspirĆ©e est fixĆ©e contre la face extĆ©rieure du porte-lame donc contre la face du porte-lame orientĆ©e du cotĆ© du capot correspondant de l'harmonica tandis que la lame soufflĆ©e est fixĆ©e contre la face dudit porte-lames plaquĆ©e contre le sommier . L'extrĆ©mitĆ© fixe de chacune des deux lames peut ĆŖtre fixĆ©e et maintenue plaquĆ©e contre le porte-lame soit par soudage , par collage , par rivetage ou mieux encore Ć  l'aide d'une ou de plusieurs vis . Selon un mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de ce mode de rĆ©alisation , une ou plusieurs vis traversent Ć  la fois chacun des deux dĆ©flecteurs associĆ©s aux deux lames concernĆ©es ainsi que le porte-lame et le talon de fixation des deux lames de telle sorte qu'une seule vis ou Ć©ventuellement deux vis suffisent Ć  assurer l'assemblage et le maintien en position desdites lames et desdits dĆ©flecteurs par rapport au porte-lames . Une telle disposition s'avĆØre tout Ć  la fois trĆØs facile et trĆØs rapide au montage et par voie de consĆ©quence trĆØs Ć©conomique tout en offrant le trĆØs grand avantage de pouvoir ĆŖtre facilement dĆ©montable aussi bien pour le nettoyage efficace de l'instrument que pour le changement aisĆ© d'une lame sonore dĆ©faillante. Les dĆ©flecteurs susmentionnĆ©es peuvent ĆŖtre aussi bien rĆ©alisĆ©s en mĆ©tal qu'en matiĆØre thermoplastique ou en matiĆØre thermodurcissable . According to another preferred embodiment, each of the air circulation channels feeds at least one blown blade and an aspirated blade. The two blades served by the same air channel are disposed in line on either side of the respective blade carrier and their respective longitudinal axes are coplanar with the longitudinal axis of said air channel while the oscillating free parts of said two sound waves stretch in diametrically opposite directions with respect to each other. The suction blade is fixed against the outer face of the blade holder and against the face of the blade holder oriented on the side of the corresponding cover of the harmonica while the blown blade is fixed against the face of said blade holder pressed against the bed base. The fixed end of each of the two blades can be fixed and held pressed against the blade holder either by welding, gluing, riveting or even better with the aid of one or more screws. According to a preferred embodiment of this embodiment, one or more screws pass through each of the two baffles associated with the two blades concerned as well as the blade holder and the bead of the two blades so that a single screw or possibly two screws are sufficient to ensure the assembly and the holding in position of said blades and said baffles relative to the blade holder. Such an arrangement proves very easy and very quick assembly and therefore very economical while offering the great advantage of being easily removable as well for the effective cleaning of the instrument for change easy of a failing sound blade. The aforementioned deflectors may be made of metal as well as thermoplastic material or thermosetting material.
Lorsque les dĆ©flecteurs constituent des piĆØces rapportĆ©es fixĆ©es au porte-lame Ć  l'aide de vis ils peuvent ĆŖtre avantageusement taraudĆ©s pour permettre le vissage directe de la vis correspondante . When the baffles are attached parts fixed to the blade holder with screws they can be advantageously tapped to allow direct screwing of the corresponding screw.
Selon un mode de rĆ©alisation prĆ©fĆ©rentielle , lesdits dĆ©flecteurs sont avantageusement rĆ©alisĆ©s dans une matiĆØre lĆ©gĆØrement Ć©lastiquement dĆ©formable de faƧon Ć  ce que, sous la pression de serrage exercĆ©e par la vis de fixation , ils puissent se dĆ©former lĆ©gĆØrement pour venir parfaitement Ć©pouser la face du porte-lame contre laquelle ils sont pressĆ©s et ce de maniĆØre Ć  Ć©viter tout passage d'air entre lesdites piĆØces . Par ailleurs , compte-tenu de cette lĆ©gĆØre dĆ©formation Ć©lastique par fluage du dĆ©flecteur , il est possible de rĆ©aliser au travers dudit dĆ©flecteur un trou d'un diamĆØtre lĆ©gĆØrement infĆ©rieur Ć  celui de la vis de fixation de telle maniĆØre que celle-ci soit ainsi freinĆ©e pour qu'elle ne risque pas de se dĆ©visser intempestivement sous l'effet des vibrations gĆ©nĆ©rĆ©es par l'instrument . Ceci reprĆ©sente un trĆØs gros avantage sur le plan de la sĆ©curitĆ© car il faut savoir qu'une lame sonore fixĆ©e au porte-lames Ć  l'aide d'une simple vis comme c'est le cas en rĆ©paration classique d'harmonica dans l'art antĆ©rieur peut toujours se dĆ©visser accidentellement et le joueur a alors toutes les chances d'avaler, ou mĆŖme d'inhaler en jouant, ladite lame avec tous les dangers que peut reprĆ©senter une telle piĆØce mince et coupante dans les poumons de l'harmoniciste . According to a preferred embodiment, said deflectors are advantageously made of a slightly elastically deformable material so that, under the clamping pressure exerted by the fixing screw, they can deform slightly to fit perfectly the face of the holder. blade against which they are pressed and so as to avoid any air passage between said parts. Furthermore, given this slight elastic deformation by creep of the deflector, it is possible to achieve through said deflector a hole of a diameter slightly smaller than that of the fixing screw so that it is thus braked so that it will not be unintentionally unscrewed by the vibrations generated by the instrument. This represents a very big advantage in terms of safety because we must know that a sound blade attached to the blade holder with a simple screw as is the case in conventional harmonica repair in the prior art can always unintentionally unscrew and the player then has every chance to swallow, or even to inhale playing, said blade with all the dangers that can represent such a thin and sharp piece in the lungs of the harmonica player.
Selon une variante de rĆ©alisation , si la matiĆØre retenue pour la rĆ©alisation des dĆ©flecteurs est trop souple pour permettre d'offrir une tenue suffisante par vissage direct de la vis de fixation dans le dĆ©flecteur ladite vis pourra alors avantageusement ĆŖtre associĆ©e Ć  un Ć©crou mĆ©tallique classique qui pourra ĆŖtre en partie au moins noyĆ© dans un logement de forme idoine amĆ©nagĆ© dans ledit dĆ©flecteur . Selon un mode de montage particulier les dĆ©flecteurs sont dĆ©montables et fixĆ©s au porte- lames correspondant par des vis de fixation et plusieurs dĆ©flecteurs Ć©quipant des lames sonores contigus peuvent ĆŖtre avantageusement rĆ©unis ensemble de faƧon Ć  constituer un ensemble monolithique leur Ć©vitant de se dĆ©placer par rotation sous l'effet des vibrations gĆ©nĆ©rĆ©es par les lames sonores en offrant par ailleurs l'avantage d'un coĆ»t de revient plus intĆ©ressant que lorsqu'ils sont chacun indĆ©pendant et donc produits chacun individuellement . Selon un autre mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de rĆ©alisation , le dĆ©flecteur, en collaboration avec la vis d'assemblage correspondante, constituent avantageusement un moyen de fixation efficace d'une lamelle rapportĆ©e dĆ©coupĆ©e dans un matĆ©riau souple et rĆ©sistant pour constituer une valve d'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© s'opposant aux entrĆ©es d'air ,aux travers de la fenĆŖtre concernĆ©e , dans le sens opposĆ© Ć  celui qui correspond Ć  la spĆ©cificitĆ© de la lame .La largeur et la longueur de cette lamelle-valve sont supĆ©rieures aux dimensions correspondantes de la fenĆŖtre concernĆ©e de maniĆØre Ć  ce que la pĆ©riphĆ©rie de ladite lamelle puisse venir prendre appui directement sur la face du porte-lames afin de garantir une Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© satisfaisante . Sur les porte-lames de l'art antĆ©rieur ces lamelles-valves, bien connues de l'homme de l'art, sont collĆ©es ce qui rend difficile et dĆ©licate leur pose et leur remplacement ; par ailleurs leur tenue dans le temps est souvent peu Ć©levĆ©e en raison des solvants contenus dans la colle de fixation utilisĆ©e qui altĆØrent les propriĆ©tĆ©s desdites valves rĆ©alisĆ©es dans des matiĆØres plastiques souvent sensibles auxdits solvants, lesquels solvants constituent par ailleurs un danger pour l'utilisateur en raison des vapeurs que celui-ci inhale durant son temps de jeu . According to an alternative embodiment, if the material selected for the production of the deflectors is too flexible to provide sufficient strength by direct screwing of the fastening screw in the deflector said screw can then advantageously be associated with a conventional metal nut which may be partially at least drowned in a housing of appropriate shape arranged in said deflector. According to a particular mounting mode the baffles are removable and fixed to the corresponding blade holder by fixing screws and several baffles equipping adjacent sound blades can be advantageously joined together so as to constitute a monolithic assembly avoiding them to move by rotation under the effect of the vibrations generated by the sound blades while also offering the advantage of a cost more interesting than when they are each independent and therefore produced individually. According to another preferred embodiment, the deflector, in collaboration with the corresponding assembly screw, advantageously constitute an effective means of fixing an inserts strip cut in a flexible and resistant material to form an opposing sealing valve. to the air inlets, through the window concerned, in the opposite direction to that corresponding to the specificity of the blade. The width and the length of this leaflet are greater than the corresponding dimensions of the window concerned so as to that the periphery of said blade can come to bear directly on the face of the blade holder to ensure a satisfactory seal. On the blades of the prior art these lamella-valves, well known to those skilled in the art, are glued which makes it difficult and difficult to install and replace them; Moreover, their behavior in time is often low because of the solvents contained in the fixing adhesive used which alter the properties of said valves made in plastics often sensitive to said solvents, which solvents also constitute a danger for the user. because of the vapors that it inhales during its play time.
La fixation desdites valves Ć  l'aide de la vis de fixation associĆ©e au dĆ©flecteur concernĆ© est donc une rĆ©ponse pertinente aux problĆØmes ci-avant exposĆ©s et ce mode de fixation mĆ©canique et non par collage offre la possibilitĆ© trĆØs intĆ©ressante de permettre l'utilisation de matiĆØres plastiques telle que les polytetrafluorethylĆØne ( PTFE ) souvent communĆ©ment dĆ©nommĆ©es "TĆ©flon" ou les polyolĆ©fines qui prĆ©sentent des caractĆ©ristiques extrĆŖmement intĆ©ressantes en terme de rĆ©sistance aux flexions alternĆ©es et surtout d'anti-adhĆ©sion mais qui de ce fait ne peuvent pas ĆŖtre collĆ©es et ne sont donc pas utilisables dans le mode de rĆ©alisation de l'art antĆ©rieur . Fixing said valves with the fixing screw associated with the deflector concerned is therefore a relevant answer to the problems discussed above and this method of mechanical attachment and not by gluing offers the very interesting possibility of allowing the use of materials. plastics such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) often known as "Teflon" or polyolefins which have extremely interesting characteristics in terms of resistance to alternating flexion and especially anti-adhesion but which therefore can not be glued and are not therefore not usable in the embodiment of the prior art.
Dans ce mode de rĆ©alisation , la vis d'assemblage et le dĆ©flecteur prennent donc en sandwich entre eux deux Ć  la fois la lame sonore concernĆ©e, le porte-lame et la lamelle valve susdĆ©crite . Ā In this embodiment, the assembly screw and the baffle thus sandwich between them both the sound blade concerned, the blade holder and the valve leaflet described above.
Selon un autre mode de rĆ©alisation particulier la valve telle que ci-avant dĆ©crite constitue un seul ensemble monolithique avec le dĆ©flecteur de la lame opposĆ©e. Ce mode de rĆ©alisation trĆØs avantageux est applicable lorsque les lames aspirĆ©es et soufflĆ©es sont rĆ©unies par paires en Ć©tant disposĆ©es en ligne de part et d'autre du porte-lames concernĆ© leurs axes longitudinaux respectifs Ć©tant coplanaires avec l'axe longitudinal du canal d'air unique qui les dessert . Dans ce mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de rĆ©alisation certaines au moins des paires de lames sonores peuvent donc ĆŖtre associĆ©es Ć  un dĆ©flecteur recouvrant une partie de la longueur de la fenĆŖtre du porte-lames au travers de laquelle oscille la premiĆØre lame sonore qui est soit du type lame aspirĆ©e soit du type lame soufflĆ©e. Le dĆ©flecteur se prolonge par une fine lamelle souple s'Ć©tendant dans le sens opposĆ© Ć  l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame sonore dont il constitue le dĆ©flecteur et cette lamelle souple constitue la valve d'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© de la seconde lame sonore alimentĆ© par le canal d'air concernĆ© . La longueur et la largeur de la lamelle souple sont supĆ©rieures aux dimensions de la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille cette seconde lame sonore qui est de type opposĆ© Ć  la premiĆØre lame , donc respectivement soit une lame soufflĆ©e soit une lame aspirĆ©e . Lorsque le flux d'air est de sens contraire Ć  celui qui correspond au type de la seconde lame sonore , il vient plaquer la lamelle souple contre la face du porte-lames en obturant ainsi complĆØtement la fenĆŖtre de passage d'air de cette seconde lame sonore et en obligeant de ce fait Ć  la totalitĆ© du flux d'air de passer au travers de la fenĆŖtre de la premiĆØre lame dont le type aspirĆ© ou soufflĆ© correspond bien lui au sens du flux en cours . According to another particular embodiment, the valve as described above constitutes a single monolithic assembly with the deflector of the opposite blade. This very advantageous embodiment is applicable when the blades sucked and blown are connected in pairs being arranged in line on either side of the blade holder concerned their respective longitudinal axes being coplanar with the longitudinal axis of the air channel unique that serves them. In this preferred embodiment, at least some of the pairs of sound blades may therefore be associated with a deflector covering a portion of the length of the window of the blade carrier through which the first sound blade oscillates, which is either of the suction blade type. either of the blown blade type. The deflector is extended by a thin flexible blade extending in the opposite direction to the free end of the sound blade of which it constitutes the baffle and this flexible blade constitutes the sealing valve of the second sound blade fed by the air channel concerned. The length and the width of the flexible blade are greater than the dimensions of the window through which oscillates this second sound blade which is of the opposite type to the first blade, so respectively either a blown blade or an aspirated blade. When the flow of air is opposite to that which corresponds to the type of the second sound blade, it comes to press the flexible blade against the face of the blade holder thus completely closing the air passage window of the second blade sound and thus forcing the entire air flow to pass through the window of the first blade whose type sucked or blown corresponds to it in the direction of the current flow.
Le dĆ©flecteur et la lamelle fine constituant la valve peuvent ĆŖtre avantageusement rĆ©alisĆ©s ,par moulage notamment, en mĆŖme temps et dans le mĆŖme matiĆØre pour constituer alors un ensemble monolithique monocomposant aussi bien qu'ĆŖtre rĆ©alisĆ©s en injection bi-matiĆØre Ć  partir de deux matiĆØres diffĆ©rentes mais nĆ©anmoins compatibles entre elles . Bien-sur la matiĆØre retenue pour la rĆ©alisation de la lamelle-valve ainsi que le cas Ć©chĆ©ant pour la rĆ©alisation du dĆ©flecteur pourra avantageusement ĆŖtre du type thermoplastique en sĆ©lectionnant une matiĆØre prĆ©sentant les caractĆ©ristiques idoines en termes de souplesse , de rĆ©sistance Ć  la dĆ©chirure et aux flexions alternĆ©es , d'anti-adhĆ©rence, et de mĆ©moire Ć©lastique . Ā The baffle and the thin blade constituting the valve may advantageously be produced, in particular by molding, at the same time and in the same material to then constitute a single-component monolithic assembly as well as being made in two-material injection from two different materials. but nevertheless compatible with each other. Of course, the material selected for producing the valve leaflet and, if appropriate, for producing the baffle may advantageously be of the thermoplastic type by selecting a material having the appropriate characteristics in terms of flexibility, resistance to tearing and tearing. alternating bending, anti-adhesion, and elastic memory.
Selon une autre caractƩristique , lorsqu'ils sont fixƩs au porte-lames Ơ l'aide d'une vis , les dƩflecteurs comportent avantageusement un ergot venant en saillie par rapport Ơ leur face d'appui contre le porte-lames , ledit ergot venant se loger dans un trou de forme correspondante rƩalisƩ dans le porte-lames pour s'opposer Ơ toute rotation intempestive du dƩflecteur concernƩ . According to another characteristic, when they are fixed to the blade holder by means of a screw, the baffles advantageously comprise a lug projecting from their bearing surface against the blade holder, said lug coming from housed in a correspondingly shaped hole made in the blade holder to oppose any inadvertent rotation of the deflector concerned.
Selon un mode de rĆ©alisation particulier dans lequel la lame soufflĆ©e et la lame aspirĆ©e correspondantes sont disposĆ©es de faƧon diamĆ©tralement opposĆ©es l'une par rapport Ć  l'autre de part et d'autre du porte-lames ,1e dĆ©flecteur associĆ© Ć  la lame soufflĆ©e et/ou le dĆ©flecteur associĆ© la lame aspirĆ©e comporte un petit ergot anti-rotation en saillie par rapport sa face d'appui contre le porte-lame , ledit ergot venant se loger dans l'Ć©paisseur du porte-lames dans la fenĆŖtre dans laquelle oscille la lame opposĆ©e Ć  celle pour laquelle il joue le rĆ“le de dĆ©flecteur. Ā According to a particular embodiment in which the blown blade and the corresponding sucked blade are disposed diametrically opposite each other on either side of the blade holder, the deflector associated with the blown blade and / or the associated deflector the suction blade has a small anti-rotation pin protruding from its bearing surface against the blade holder, said pin being housed in the thickness of the blade holder in the window in which oscillates the blade opposite to that for which it plays the role of deflector.
Selon une caractĆ©ristique d'un mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de rĆ©alisation , en corrĆ©lation logique avec les amplitudes respectives des oscillations de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de chacune des lames sonores qui sont elles mĆŖmes en relation directe avec les longueurs respectives desdites lames sonores au moins au niveau de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre des lames sonores , l'Ć©paisseur de l'un au moins des porte-lames que comporte l'harmonica est avantageusement dĆ©gressive de faƧon continue ou par pallier des lames graves aux lames aiguĆ«s et par voie de consĆ©quence , la hauteur d'au moins l'une des faces latĆ©rales de la fenĆŖtre aux travers de laquelle oscille la lame la plus grave dudit porte-lames est supĆ©rieure Ć  la hauteur de la face latĆ©rale correspondante de la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille la lame la plus aiguĆ« dudit porte-lames . According to a characteristic of a preferred embodiment, in logical correlation with the respective amplitudes of the oscillations of the free end of each of the sound waves which are themselves directly related to the respective lengths of said sound waves at least at the level of the free end of the sound waves, the thickness of at least one of the blade carriers that comprises the harmonica is advantageously degressive continuously or by palliating serious blades acute blades and consequently, the height of at least one of the side faces of the window through which oscillates the lowest blade of said blade carrier is greater than the height of the corresponding lateral face of the window through which oscillates the highest blade of said blade holder.
Selon un mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de rĆ©alisation , l'harmonica selon l'invention comporte un peigne dans lequel est amĆ©nagĆ©e une pluralitĆ© de parois dĆ©limitant des canaux de circulation d'air alimentant deux porte-lames disposĆ©s de part et d'autre du plan longitudinal moyen ( Px ) de l'harmonica chacun desdits porte-lames supportant plusieurs lames vibrantes sonores du mĆŖme type, aspirĆ© ou soufflĆ© , positionnĆ©es en correspondance avec les canaux de circulation d'air susmentionnĆ©s . Les axes longitudinaux des deux lames sonores , l'une du type soufflĆ© l'autre du type aspirĆ© , alimentĆ© par le canal commun concernĆ© sont avantageusement coplanaires selon un plan disposĆ© perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal moyen Px de l'instrument . According to a preferred embodiment, the harmonica according to the invention comprises a comb in which is arranged a plurality of walls delimiting air circulation channels feeding two blade holders arranged on either side of the mean longitudinal plane ( Px) of the harmonica each of said blade holder supporting a plurality of sound vibrating blades of the same type, drawn or blown, positioned in correspondence with the aforementioned air circulation channels. The longitudinal axes of the two sound waves, one of the blown type and the other type sucked, fed by the common channel concerned are advantageously coplanar in a plane disposed perpendicularly to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument.
Entre la face d'embouchure de l'instrument et les lames sonores vibrantes qu'il comporte est implantĆ© un distributeur d'air coulissant , destinĆ© Ć  diriger sĆ©lectivement l'air soufflĆ© ou aspirĆ© par le joueur vers l'un ou l'autre des deux canaux de circulation d'air alimentĆ©s par un trou d'embouchure commun auxdits deux canaux d'air qui chacun peuvent alimenter Ć  leur tour au moins une lame soufflĆ©e et au moins une lame aspirĆ©e. Pour chacun des trous d'embouchure , les deux canaux de circulation d'air susmentionnĆ©s alimentĆ©s par ledit trou d'embouchure commun sont disposĆ©s cĆ“te Ć  cĆ“te en Ć©tant sĆ©parĆ©s l'un de l'autre par une paroi de sĆ©paration disposĆ©e perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal moyen Px . L'une des extrĆ©mitĆ©s de ladite paroi de sĆ©paration vient s'appuyer contre la face concernĆ©e du premier porte-lames tandis que l'autre extrĆ©mitĆ© de ladite paroi de sĆ©paration vient s'appuyer contre la face correspondante du second porte-lames. Le distributeur d'air coulissant se dĆ©place par translation axiale dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument pour passer de sa premiĆØre position, dans laquelle il occulte l'entrĆ©e du second canal de circulation d'air et il dirige les flux d'air vers le premier canal alimentant au moins une lame du premier porte-lames et au moins une lame du second porte-lames, Ć  sa seconde position dans laquelle il occulte l'entrĆ©e du premier canal de circulation d'air et il dirige les flux d'air vers le second canal alimentant au moins une lame du premier porte-lames et au moins une lame du second porte-lames. Ā Between the mouth face of the instrument and the vibrating sound blades that it comprises is implanted a sliding air distributor, intended to selectively direct the air blown or sucked by the player towards one or the other of two air circulation channels fed by a mouth hole common to said two air channels, each of which can in turn supply at least one blown blade and at least one aspirated blade. For each of the mouth holes, the two aforementioned air circulation channels fed by said common mouth hole are arranged side by side, being separated from each other by a separating wall disposed perpendicularly to the longitudinal plane. average Px. One end of said partition wall abuts against the relevant face of the first blade holder while the other end of said partition wall bears against the corresponding face of the second blade holder. The sliding air distributor moves in axial translation in the longitudinal direction of the instrument to move from its first position, in which it conceals the entrance of the second air circulation channel and directs the air flows to the first channel feeding at least one blade of the first blade holder and at least one blade of the second blade holder, to its second position in which it conceals the inlet of the first air flow channel and directs the flow of air to the second channel feeding at least one blade of the first blade carrier and at least one blade of the second blade carrier.
Selon un premier mode rĆ©alisation , le distributeur d'air est du type poussant et il est automatiquement ramenĆ© vers sa position sortie au maximum du corps de l'harmonica par les moyens de rappel et le joueur doit donc exercer un appui sur l'organe de commande correspondant pour l'amener de sa premiĆØre position sortie Ć  sa seconde position rentrĆ©e . Selon un mode de montage inversĆ©, Ć  l'inverse du prĆ©cĆ©dent, le distributeur d'air est du type tirant et il est automatiquement ramenĆ© vers sa position rentrĆ© au maximum dans l'harmonica par les moyens de rappel et le joueur doit donc exercer une traction sur l'organe de commande correspondant pour l'amener de sa premiĆØre position rentrĆ©e Ć  sa seconde position sortie. According to a first embodiment, the air distributor is of the pushing type and is automatically returned to its maximum output position of the body of the harmonica by the return means and the player must therefore exert a bearing on the corresponding control member to bring it from its first extended position to its second retracted position. According to an inverted mounting mode, unlike the previous one, the air distributor is of the pulling type and it is automatically returned to its maximum retracted position in the harmonica by the return means and the player must therefore exercise a pulling on the corresponding control member to bring it from its first retracted position to its second extended position.
Selon une caractƩristique importante l'harmonica selon l'invention comporte des moyens, directement accessibles de l'extƩrieur sans nƩcessiter le dƩmontage de l'instrument, permettant de rƩgler directement Ơ la main Ơ l'aide d'une molette ou a l'aide d'un outil la prƩcontrainte des moyens assurant de rappel automatique en position non sortie du distributeur d'air coulissant si il est du type poussant ou en position rentrƩe dudit distributeur si il est du type tirant et ce de faƧon a adapter facilement ladite prƩcontrainte aux souhaits du joueur. According to an important characteristic, the harmonica according to the invention comprises means that are directly accessible from the outside without requiring dismantling of the instrument, making it possible to adjust directly by hand using a wheel or with the aid of of a tool prestressing the means ensuring automatic return to the non-output position of the sliding air distributor if it is of the pushing type or in the retracted position of said distributor if it is of the pulling type and so as to easily adapt said prestressing to wishes of the player.
Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique du mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de rĆ©alisation ci-avant dĆ©crit , le distributeur d'air est en forme gĆ©nĆ©rale d'Ć©chelle constituĆ©e de deux Ć©lĆ©ments longitudinaux disposĆ©s sensiblement parallĆØlement Ć  l'axe longitudinal de l'instrument reliĆ©s entre eux par des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux associĆ© chacun Ć  un trou d'embouchure qui lui est propre . According to another characteristic of the preferred embodiment described above, the air distributor is in the general shape of a scale consisting of two longitudinal elements arranged substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis of the instrument interconnected by transverse elements. each associated with a mouth hole of its own.
La face de chacun des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux disposĆ©e sensiblement parallĆØlement Ć  la face d'embouchure de l'instrument comporte au voisinage de ses deux bords libres infĆ©rieurs des petits retours disposĆ©s en saillie par rapport Ć  ladite face de telle maniĆØre que l'arĆŖte extrĆŖme desdits retours est plus Ć©loignĆ©e de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument que ne l'est l'arĆŖte extrĆŖme de la paroi sĆ©parant entre eux deux canaux adjacents de circulation d'air alimentĆ© par un trou d'embouchure commun .Ces petits retours en saillie sont destinĆ©s Ć  assurer une Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© face aux fuites d'air latĆ©rales en constituant une chicane lorsqu'ils viennent en appui contre la face correspondante de la partie supĆ©rieure de la paroi de sĆ©paration sĆ©parant deux canaux voisins alimentĆ©s par un mĆŖme trou d'embouchure . Ā The face of each of the transverse elements disposed substantially parallel to the mouth face of the instrument comprises in the vicinity of its two lower free edges small returns arranged projecting from said face so that the extreme edge of said returns is farther from the mouth of the instrument than is the extreme edge of the wall separating two adjacent channels of air circulation fed by a common mouth hole. These small protruding returns are intended to provide a seal against side air leakage by forming a baffle when they bear against the corresponding face of the upper part of the partition wall separating two adjacent channels fed by the same mouth hole.
Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique trĆØs importante du mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de rĆ©alisation ci-avant dĆ©crit , sur une partie au moins de leur longueur les Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux susmentionnĆ©s du distributeur d'air sont de forme profilĆ©e globalement prismatique et la largeur, mesurĆ©e dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument , desdits Ć©lĆ©ments prismatiques est globalement dĆ©gressive au fur et Ć  mesure que l'on s'Ć©loigne de leur face situĆ©e la plus proche du pavillon de l'instrument pour se rapprocher de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument et chacune des deux parois latĆ©rales du trou d'embouchure et /ou du peigne contre lesquelles vient s'appuyer la face correspondante dudit Ć©lĆ©ment transversal est de forme et d'inclinaison sensiblement complĆ©mentaires Ć  celles des faces correspondantes desdits Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux de telles maniĆØres que lesdites surfaces puissent s'Ć©pouser entre elles pour garantir une Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© optimale face aux fuites d'air . According to another very important characteristic of the preferred embodiment described above, over at least part of their length the above-mentioned transverse elements of the air distributor are generally profiled prismatic shape and the width, measured in the longitudinal direction of the 'instrument, said prismatic elements is generally degressive as one moves away from their face closest to the flag of the instrument to get closer to the mouth face of the instrument and each of the two side walls of the mouth hole and / or the comb against which the corresponding face of said transverse element bears is of shape and inclination substantially complementary to those of the corresponding faces of said transverse elements in such manners as said surfaces; can marry each other to ensure an optimal seal against air leaks.
Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique, pour amĆ©liorer l'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© entre les faces du dĆ©flecteur en contact avec les faces correspondante de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure et/ou du peigne , certaines au moins desdites piĆØces pourront avantageusement ĆŖtre soit recouvertes d'un revĆŖtement lĆ©gĆØrement souple et Ć©lastiquement dĆ©formable soir ĆŖtre mĆŖme constituĆ©es en partie ou en totalitĆ© d'un matĆ©riau lĆ©gĆØrement Ć©lastiquement dĆ©formable . According to another feature, to improve the seal between the faces of the baffle in contact with the corresponding faces of the mouthpiece element and / or the comb, at least some of said parts may advantageously be covered with a slightly flexible coating and elastically deformable even be constituted in part or in whole of a slightly elastically deformable material.
Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique la partie extrĆŖme supĆ©rieure du peigne , ou sommier, constituĆ©e par l'arĆŖte supĆ©rieure des parois sĆ©parant entre eux deux canaux de circulation d'air adjacents alimentĆ©s par deux trous d'embouchure diffĆ©rents est situĆ©e plus proche de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument que ne l'est la face infĆ©rieure de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure dans la face supĆ©rieure duquel sont amĆ©nagĆ©s les trous d'embouchure de l'instrument et la partie supĆ©rieure des parois de sĆ©paration ci-avant mentionnĆ©es vient s'emboĆ®ter dans un logement de forme complĆ©mentaire amĆ©nagĆ© dans la partie infĆ©rieure correspondante dudit Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure . According to another characteristic, the upper end portion of the comb, or bed base, constituted by the upper edge of the walls separating between them two adjacent air circulation channels fed by two different mouth holes is located closer to the face of the mouth of the instrument that is the lower face of the mouthpiece element in the upper face of which are formed the mouth of the instrument holes and the upper part of the partition walls mentioned above has come s nesting in a housing of complementary shape arranged in the corresponding lower part of said mouthpiece member.
Le distributeur d'air ci-avant dĆ©crit dont les faces inclinĆ©es jouent le rĆ“le de dĆ©flecteurs permettent une directivitĆ© optimale et avec le moins de pertes de charge possibles des flux d'air permettant ainsi aussi bien de rendre moins difficile la mise en vibration des lames que d'Ć©largir la gamme d'expressivitĆ© musicale par rapport Ć  ce que permettaient les distributeurs d'air de l'art antĆ©rieur. Ces derniers sont en effet constituĆ©s d'une simple plaque coulissante dans laquelle sont amĆ©nagĆ©s des trous venant se placer en vis-Ć -vis des canaux concernĆ©s , ladite plaque Ć©tant disposĆ©e perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal moyen Px de l'instrument l'Ć©coulement des flux d'air tant soufflĆ©s qu'aspirĆ©s se retrouve trĆØs perturbĆ©s par les faces perpendiculaires qu'il rencontrent et qui l'affaiblisse fortement et le rendent tourbillonnaire, obligeant le joueur Ć  compenser en forƧant son action ce qui est inconfortable et qui surtout exclue la possibilitĆ© de rĆ©aliser des pianissimo exigeant un trĆØs faible flux d'air rĆ©duisant ainsi d'autant les possibilitĆ© d'expressivitĆ© du joueur . Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique, l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure dans la face supĆ©rieure duquel sont implantĆ©s les faces d'entrĆ©e des trous d'embouchure est solidarisĆ© au peigne par des moyens disposĆ©s Ć  l'intĆ©rieur de l'harmonica et qui sont directement accessibles lorsque les capots de l'instrument ont Ć©tĆ©s dĆ©posĆ©s. Les moyens de solidarisation susmentionnĆ©s peuvent ĆŖtre avantageusement constituĆ©s d'Ć©crous et/ou de vis moletĆ©s de maniĆØre Ć  ce qu'ils puissent ĆŖtre dĆ©montables Ć  la main sans outil . . Selon un mode de rĆ©alisation particulier l'harmonica selon l'invention comporte un contre- peigne en forme de mĆ¢choire ouverte en direction de l'embouchure de l'instrument dont la conicitĆ© des faces est complĆ©mentaire Ć  la conicitĆ© des faces correspondantes du peigne lui aussi conique dans ce mode de rĆ©alisation de telle sorte que lesdites faces correspondantes sont donc parallĆØles deux Ć  deux ,et chacun des deux porte-lames de l'instrument est pris en sandwich entre la face du peigne et la face correspondante du contre-peigne. Des moyens gĆ©nĆ©rant une poussĆ©e tendant Ć  rapprocher le contre-peigne de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument assurent le placage des porte-lames contre le peigne Selon un mode de rĆ©alisation particulier , les moyens de poussĆ©e susmentionnĆ©s sont constituĆ© d'une lame flexible ou d'une tige flexible de section ronde ou de toute autre forme s'Ć©tendant dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument venant s'arrimer au peigne lui-mĆŖme et/ou au capots ou Ć  la coque pĆ©riphĆ©rique de l'instrument . The above described air distributor whose inclined faces act as deflectors allow optimal directivity and with the least possible pressure drop of the air flow thus making it as well to make it less difficult to vibrate the blades. than to expand the range of musical expressiveness compared to what allowed the air distributors of the prior art. The latter are in fact constituted by a simple sliding plate in which holes are arranged which are placed opposite the channels concerned, said plate being arranged perpendicular to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument flow flows air both blown and sucked is very disturbed by the perpendicular faces it encounters and weakens it strongly and make it swirling, forcing the player to compensate by forcing its action which is uncomfortable and which especially excludes the possibility to achieve pianissimo requiring a very low airflow thus reducing the possibility of expressiveness of the player. According to another feature, the mouthpiece element in the upper face of which are implanted the inlet faces of the mouth holes is secured to the comb by means arranged inside the harmonica and which are directly accessible when the instrument covers were removed. The aforementioned fastening means may advantageously consist of nuts and / or knurled screws so that they can be removed by hand without tools. . According to a particular embodiment, the harmonica according to the invention comprises a jaw-shaped comb open towards the mouth of the instrument whose conicity of the faces is complementary to the conicity of the corresponding faces of the comb also. conical in this embodiment so that said corresponding faces are therefore parallel in pairs, and each of the two blade holders of the instrument is sandwiched between the face of the comb and the corresponding face of the counter-comb. Means generating a thrust tending to bring the counter-comb to the mouth face of the instrument ensure the veneer of the blade holder against the comb According to a particular embodiment, the aforementioned thrust means consist of a blade flexible or a flexible rod of round section or any other shape extending in the longitudinal direction of the instrument coming to dock with the comb itself and / or the covers or the peripheral shell of the instrument.
Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique d'un autre mode de rĆ©alisation , chacun des canaux de circulation d'air alimente au moins deux lames soufflĆ©es et deux lames aspirĆ©es et les quatre lames desservies par un mĆŖme canal d'air sont disposĆ©es tĆŖte bĆŖche de part et d'autre du porte-lames concernĆ© et leurs axes longitudinaux respectifs sont disposĆ©s parallĆØlement entre eux de part et d'autre du plan passant par l'axe longitudinal du canal, les parties libres oscillantes desdites deux lames sonores s'Ć©tirant dans deux directions opposĆ©es l'une par rapport Ć  l'autre . According to another feature of another embodiment, each of the air circulation channels feeds at least two blown blades and two aspirated blades and the four blades served by the same air channel are arranged head to tail on both sides. the other of the respective blade holder and their respective longitudinal axes are arranged parallel to each other on either side of the plane passing through the longitudinal axis of the channel, the oscillating free parts of said two sound blades stretching in two opposite directions; one with respect to the other.
Selon une autre caractƩristique, l'harmonica selon l'invention comporte des ouvertures amƩnagƩes au travers d'au moins un capot, lesdites ouvertures Ʃtant positionnƩes au niveau de la partie libre oscillante des lames sonores aspirƩes concernƩes , notamment pour les lames graves aspirƩes de l'instrument qui exigent un approvisionnement en air important souvent pƩnalisƩ par les dispositions antƩrieures dans lesquelles lesdites lames aspirƩes se retrouvent emprisonnƩes au fond du cul de sac reprƩsentƩ par le capot concernƩ . According to another characteristic, the harmonica according to the invention comprises openings arranged through at least one cover, said openings being positioned at the level of the oscillating free part of the aspected sound strips concerned, in particular for the low suction blades of the instrument that require a large air supply often penalized by the prior arrangements in which said aspirated blades are trapped at the bottom of the cul de sac represented by the hood concerned.
Description sommaire des dessins D'autres avantages et caractĆ©ristiques ressortiront plus clairement de la description qui va suivre des diffĆ©rents modes de rĆ©alisation montrĆ©s Ć  titre d'exemples non limitatifs et reprĆ©sentĆ©s aux dessins annexĆ©s dans lesquels : ā–  Les figures 1 Ć  23 correspondent Ć  un premier mode de rĆ©alisation d'un harmonica selon l'invention. Brief description of the drawings Other advantages and features will emerge more clearly from the following description of the various embodiments shown by way of nonlimiting examples and represented in the accompanying drawings, in which: FIGS. 1 to 23 correspond to a first embodiment of FIG. a harmonica according to the invention.
ā–  Les figures 24 et 25 sont des vues partielles agrandies montrant un second mode de rĆ©alisation des canaux de circulation d'air et du distributeur d'air respectivement dans les deux positions extrĆŖmes , enfoncĆ©e et sortie que peut occuper ledit distributeur d'air coulissant , Ā FIGS. 24 and 25 are enlarged partial views showing a second embodiment of the air circulation channels and of the air distributor respectively in the two extreme positions, recessed and outlet that can occupy said sliding air distributor,
ā–  Les figures 26 et 27 sont des vues partielles agrandies montrant un troisiĆØme mode de rĆ©alisation des canaux de circulation d'air et du distributeur d'air respectivement dans les deux positions extrĆŖmes , enfoncĆ©e et sortie que peut occuper ledit distributeur d'air coulissant , Ā FIGS. 26 and 27 are partial enlarged views showing a third embodiment of the air circulation channels and the air distributor respectively in the two extreme positions, driven in and out that can occupy said sliding air distributor,
ā–  Les figures 28 et 29 sont des vues partielles agrandies montrant un quatriĆØme mode de rĆ©alisation des canaux de circulation d'air et du distributeur d'air respectivement dans les deux positions extrĆŖmes , enfoncĆ©e et sortie que peut occuper ledit distributeur d'air coulissant , Figures 28 and 29 are enlarged partial views showing a fourth embodiment of the air flow channels and the air distributor respectively in the two extreme positions, recessed and output that can occupy said sliding air distributor,
ā–  Les figures 30 et 31 sont des vues partielles agrandies montrant un cinquiĆØme mode de rĆ©alisation des canaux de circulation d'air et du distributeur d'air respectivement dans les deux positions extrĆŖmes , enfoncĆ©e et sortie que peut occuper ledit distributeur d'air coulissant , Ā FIGS. 30 and 31 are enlarged partial views showing a fifth embodiment of the air circulation channels and the air distributor respectively in the two extreme positions, recessed and outlet that can occupy said sliding air distributor,
ā–  La figure 32 correspond Ć  des vues en perspective du mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de rĆ©alisation reprĆ©sentĆ© sur les figures 28 et 29 , Ā FIG. 32 corresponds to perspective views of the preferred embodiment shown in FIGS. 28 and 29,
ā–  La figure 33 montre diffĆ©rentes vues et diffĆ©rentes coupes d'un harmonica selon l'invention dont les faces du peignes contre lesquelles s'appuient les porte-lames sont parallĆØles entre elles et dont lesdits porte-lames sont Ć©quipĆ©s de dĆ©flecteurs rapportĆ©s solidarisĆ©s chacun auxdits porte-lames par une vis et un Ć©crou qui assurent par ailleurs la fixation et le plaquage de la lame sonore correspondante contre la face du porte- lames concernĆ© , FIG. 33 shows different views and different sections of a harmonica according to the invention, the faces of the combs against which the blade holders rest are parallel to each other and of which said blade holders are equipped with attached deflectors each secured to said blade holder by means of a screw and a nut which furthermore ensure the fastening and the plating of the corresponding sound blade against the face of the blade holder concerned,
ā–  Les figures 34 Ć  37 montrent un autre mode de rĆ©alisation d'un harmonica selon l'invention comportant deux porte-lames et dont le corps et l'embouchure constituent un seul ensemble monolithique . Ā FIGS. 34 to 37 show another embodiment of a harmonica according to the invention comprising two blade holders and whose body and mouth constitute a single monolithic assembly.
ā–  Les figures 38 Ć  50 montrent un autre mode de rĆ©alisation d'un harmonica selon l'invention comportant un seul porte-lames supportant toutes les lames aspirĆ©es et toutes les lames soufflĆ©es. Description dĆ©taillĆ©e de plusieurs modes de rĆ©alisation FIGS. 38 to 50 show another embodiment of a harmonica according to the invention comprising a single blade holder supporting all the aspirated blades and all the blown blades. Detailed description of several embodiments
PrĆ©alablement aux explications qui suivent il est important de prĆ©ciser que pour rendre les dessins plus lisibles et plus explicites, sur certaines des figures que comporte ce document, les Ć©paisseurs des plaques porte-lames ainsi que celles des lames sonores et le cas Ć©chant celle des lamelles d'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© ont Ć©tĆ© volontairement trĆØs largement augmentĆ©es par rapport Ć  leur Ć©paisseur rĆ©elle. De mĆŖme les jeux latĆ©raux entre les bords latĆ©raux des lames sonores et les bords correspondants des fenĆŖtres Ć  travers lesquelles elles oscillent aussi bien que les jeux entre l'extrĆ©mitĆ© desdites lamelles et la tranche correspondante desdites fenĆŖtres qui dans la rĆ©alitĆ© sont de l'ordre de 5 Ć  10 /100ĆØme de millimĆØtre ont Ć©tĆ©s ici largement augmentĆ©s pour faciliter la comprĆ©hension du dessin. Prior to the explanations that follow, it is important to specify that to make the drawings more readable and more explicit, in some of the figures in this document, the thicknesses of the cutterheads as well as those of the soundblades and, if appropriate, that of the slats sealing have been voluntarily greatly increased compared to their actual thickness. Similarly, the lateral games between the lateral edges of the sound waves and the corresponding edges of the windows through which they oscillate as well as the gaps between the end of said lamellae and the corresponding slice of said windows which in reality are of the order of 5 to 10 / 100th of a millimeter have been greatly expanded here to facilitate understanding of the drawing.
Ceci prƩcisƩ, sur les vues 1 Ơ 23 , l'harmonica 1 comporte: un ƩlƩment d'embouchure 2 dans la face extƩrieure duquel dƩbouchent les trous d'embouchures 200 par lesquels l'harmoniciste aspire ou insuffle de l'air qui met en oscillation les lames sonores de l'instrument , chacun des trous d'embouchure 200 dessert deux canaux de circulation d'air 30 et 31 alimentant chacun au moins une lame sonore soufflƩe et au moins une lame sonore aspirƩe , This specifies, in the views 1 to 23, the harmonica 1 comprises: a mouthpiece element 2 in the outer face of which open the mouth holes 200 by which the harmonicist sucks or insufflates air that oscillates the sound waves of the instrument, each of the mouth holes 200 serves two air circulation channels 30 and 31 each feeding at least one blown sound blade and at least one aspirated sound blade,
- un peigne 7 ou sommier dans l'Ć©paisseur duquel sont rĆ©alisĆ©s une pluralitĆ© de canaux de circulation d'air susmentionnĆ©s 30 et 31 disposĆ©s cĆ“te Ć  cĆ“te en Ć©tant sĆ©parĆ©s entre eux par des parois latĆ©rales disposĆ©es transversalement par rapport Ć  l'axe longitudinal de l'instrument et sensiblement perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal moyen Px l'une des extrĆ©mitĆ©s de chacune desdites parois de sĆ©paration venant s'appuyer contre la face concernĆ©e du premier porte-lames 4 tandis que l'autre extrĆ©mitĆ© de ladite paroi de sĆ©paration vient s'appuyer contre la face correspondante du second porte-lames 5 , les porte-lames 4 et 5 Ć©tant disposĆ©s obliquement l'un par rapport Ć  l'autre , les plans passant par leurs faces d'appui respective contre les faces d'appui correspondantes du peigne constituent ici un diĆØdre ouvert en direction de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument , a comb 7 or bed base in the thickness of which are made a plurality of aforementioned air circulation channels 30 and 31 arranged side by side, being separated from each other by lateral walls arranged transversely with respect to the longitudinal axis of the instrument and substantially perpendicular to the mean longitudinal plane Px, one of the ends of each of said partition walls coming to bear against the relevant face of the first blade holder 4 while the other end of said partition wall is supported against the corresponding face of the second blade holder 5, the blade holders 4 and 5 being arranged obliquely with respect to one another, the planes passing through their respective bearing faces against the corresponding bearing faces of the comb constitute here a dihedral open towards the mouth face of the instrument,
- un distributeur d'air 6, interposĆ© entre l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 et le peigne 7 ledit distributeur d'air 6 est destinĆ© Ć  diriger sĆ©lectivement l'air soufflĆ© ou aspirĆ© par le joueur vers l'un 30 ou l'autre 31 des deux canaux de circulation d'air alimentĆ©s par un trou d'embouchure 200 commun auxdits deux canaux d'air 30 et 31 , - un contre-peigne 8 ouvert en forme de mĆ¢choire ou de contre-coin dont la conicitĆ© des faces, ouverte en direction de l'embouchure de l'instrument, est identique Ć  la conicitĆ© des faces correspondantes du peigne 7 de telle sorte que lesdites faces correspondantes sont donc parallĆØles deux Ć  deux et que chacun des deux porte- lames 4 et 5 de l'instrument est pris en sandwich entre la face du peigne 7 et la face correspondante du contre-peigne 8 , an air distributor 6 interposed between the mouthpiece member 2 and the comb 7, said air distributor 6 is intended to selectively direct the air blown or sucked by the player towards one or the other 31 of the two air circulation channels fed by a mouth hole 200 common to said two air channels 30 and 31, - A counter-comb 8 in the form of a jaw or counter-wedge whose conicity of the faces, open towards the mouth of the instrument, is identical to the conicity of the corresponding faces of the comb 7 so that said corresponding faces are therefore parallel in pairs and that each of the two blade holders 4 and 5 of the instrument is sandwiched between the face of the comb 7 and the corresponding face of the counter-comb 8,
- des moyens , constituĆ©s ici par une lame flexible 9 s'Ć©tendant dans le sens longitudinal du peigne, gĆ©nĆ©rant une poussĆ©e tendant Ć  rapprocher le contre- peigne 8 de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument et ce faisant , grĆ¢ce aux formes coniques complĆ©mentaires du peigne 7 et du contre-peigne 8 , ce dĆ©placement axial du contre-peigne 8 selon le plan longitudinal moyen Px assure un parfait plaquage des porte-lames 4 et 5 contre les faces correspondantes du peigne 7 sans nĆ©cessiter de faire appel Ć  aucune vis de fixation des porte-lames contrairement aux harmonicas de l'art antĆ©rieur . means, here constituted by a flexible blade 9 extending in the longitudinal direction of the comb, generating a thrust tending to bring the counter-comb 8 closer to the mouth face of the instrument and, in this way, thanks to the conical shapes complementary to the comb 7 and the counter-comb 8, this axial displacement of the counter-comb 8 in the mean longitudinal plane Px ensures perfect plating of the blade-holders 4 and 5 against the corresponding faces of the comb 7 without requiring any use of any screws for fixing the blade holders unlike the harmonicas of the prior art.
- deux capots 10 et 10 permettant la tenue en main de l'harmonica et assurant l'amplification des sons et leur projection en direction du pavillon de l'instrument . Pour faciliter la projection du son , des ouvertures 100 sont amƩnagƩes au moins dans la face latƩrale des capots 10 . - Two covers 10 and 10 for holding in hand the harmonica and ensuring the amplification of sounds and their projection towards the flag of the instrument. To facilitate sound projection, openings 100 are arranged at least in the lateral face of the hoods 10.
Pour chacun des deux canaux de circulation d'air 30 et 31 alimentĆ©s par un trou d'embouchure commun 200 , le distributeur d'air 6 se dĆ©place par translation axiale dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument pour passer de sa premiĆØre position, dans laquelle il occulte l'entrĆ©e du second canal de circulation d'air 31 et il met en communication le trou d'embouchure 200 concernĆ© avec le premier canal 30 alimentant au moins une lame du premier porte-lames 4 et au moins une lame du second porte-lames 5 , Ć  sa seconde position dans laquelle il occulte l'entrĆ©e du premier canal de circulation d'air 30 et met en communication ledit trou d'embouchure 200 avec le second canal 31 alimentant lui aussi au moins une lame du premier porte-lames 4 et au moins une lame du second porte-lames 5 , For each of the two air circulation channels 30 and 31 fed by a common mouth hole 200, the air distributor 6 moves by axial translation in the longitudinal direction of the instrument to move from its first position, in which it conceals the entry of the second air circulation channel 31 and communicates the mouth hole 200 concerned with the first channel 30 feeding at least one blade of the first blade carrier 4 and at least one blade of the second 5, in its second position in which it conceals the entrance of the first air channel 30 and communicates said mouth hole 200 with the second channel 31 also supplying at least one blade of the first door -lames 4 and at least one blade of the second blade holder 5,
Des moyens de rappel ici constituƩs par un ressort de torsion 11 assurent le retour automatique du distributeur d'air 6 en position sortie aussitƓt que l'utilisateur cesse d'exercer une pression sur l'organe de commande dudit distributeur 6. Return means here constituted by a torsion spring 11 ensure the automatic return of the air distributor 6 in the extended position as soon as the user stops exerting pressure on the control member of said distributor 6.
Un Ć©lĆ©ment amortisseur Ć©lastiquement dĆ©formable 12 constituant une butĆ©e en position rentrĆ©e au maximum du distributeur d'air 6 est interposĆ© entre ledit distributeur et la face concernĆ©e du peigne 7 tandis qu'un second amortisseur Ć©lastiquement dĆ©formable 13 constituant une butĆ©e en position sortie au maximum du distributeur d'air 6 est interposĆ© entre le distributeur 6 et la face concernĆ©e de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 . L'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 est solidarisĆ© au peigne 7 par deux Ć©crous moletĆ©s 14, actionnables Ć  la main sans nĆ©cessiter le recours Ć  un outil, lesdits Ć©crous moletĆ©s Ć©tant positionnĆ©s Ć  l'intĆ©rieur du corps de l'harmonica pour ne pas constituer d'aspĆ©ritĆ© sur la face d'embouchure de l'instrument comme c'est le cas avec les montages de l'art antĆ©rieur dont les tĆŖtes de vis disposĆ©es dans la face d'embouchure se rĆ©vĆØlent souvent agressives pour les lĆØvres . An elastically deformable damping element 12 constituting a stop in the retracted position at the maximum of the air distributor 6 is interposed between said distributor and the face concerned of the comb 7 while a second elastically deformable damper 13 forming a stop in the extended position of the air distributor 6 is interposed between the distributor 6 and the relevant face of the mouthpiece member 2. The mouthpiece element 2 is secured to the comb 7 by two knurled nuts 14, operable by hand without requiring the use of a tool, said knurled nuts being positioned inside the body of the harmonica not to constitute roughness on the mouth face of the instrument as is the case with the assemblies of the prior art whose screw heads disposed in the mouth face are often aggressive to the lips.
On notera que pour faciliter la comprĆ©hension des figures 5 et 6 les porte-lames 4 et 5 ainsi que le contre-peigne 8 et la lame flexible 9 ne sont pas reprĆ©sentĆ©s tandis que sur la figure 7 le porte-lames supportant les lames soufflĆ©es Ć  Ć©tĆ© rajoutĆ© par rapport aux figures 5 et 6 . Comme le montrent les figures 10, 14 et 15 ainsi que la figure 8 , qui correspond Ć  une coupe transversale agrandie de l'harmonica complet effectuĆ©e selon les repĆØres de coupe A'A' de la figure 7 , l'harmonica selon l'invention comporte des parois minces 700 et 800 recouvrant partiellement les fenĆŖtres que traversent les flux d'air pour animer les lames sonores . Ā Note that to facilitate the understanding of Figures 5 and 6 the blade holders 4 and 5 and the counter-comb 8 and the flexible blade 9 are not shown while in Figure 7 the blade holder supporting the blades blown to has been added to Figures 5 and 6. As shown in FIGS. 10, 14 and 15 as well as FIG. 8, which corresponds to an enlarged cross-section of the complete harmonica made according to the cutting marks A'A 'of FIG. 7, the harmonica according to the invention has thin walls 700 and 800 partially covering the windows through which flow of air to animate the sound waves.
Ainsi la fenĆŖtre du porte-lame 4 au travers de laquelle oscille la lame aspirĆ©e 400 est recouverte sur plus de la moitiĆ© de sa longueur par un paroi mince 800 disposĆ©e entre la face intĆ©rieure du capot correspondant et le porte-lames supportant ladite lame 400 .La paroi mince 800 qui est positionnĆ©e au delĆ  de l'espace balayĆ© par la lame aspirĆ©e 400 lorsqu'elle oscille constitue un dĆ©flecteur destinĆ© autant Ć  diriger les flux d'air en direction de la partie extrĆŖme libre de la lame qu'Ć  s'opposer aux fuites d'air aspirĆ© ou soufflĆ©s entre les bords longitudinaux de ladite lame sonore et les bords correspondants de la fenĆŖtre concernĆ©e amĆ©nagĆ©e dans le porte-lames en rendant ainsi superflue la pose de dispositifs complĆ©mentaires d'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ©, dĆ©signĆ©s sous le terme de valves, qui Ć©quipent les harmonicas dits chromatiques de l'art antĆ©rieur . L'intĆ©rĆŖt des dĆ©flecteurs susdĆ©crits est donc d'autant plus grand qu'il permet de rĆ©aliser un harmonica particuliĆØrement Ć©tanche aux fuites d'air sans nĆ©cessiter l'utilisation de valves coĆ»teuses et fastidieuses Ć  entretenir , lesquelles valves Ć“tent par ailleurs la possibilitĆ© d'utiliser certaines techniques de jeu telles que les sursoufflages et suraspirations permettant d'obtenir des notes particuliĆØres qui sont intĆ©ressantes en terme d'agrĆ©mentation et d'expressivitĆ© alors que ces techniques particuliĆØres sont utilisables avec un harmonica Ć©quipĆ© de dĆ©flecteurs selon l'invention . Dans le mode de rĆ©alisation reprĆ©sentĆ© sur les figures 1 Ć  23 La lame dĆ©flecteur 800 associĆ©e aux lames aspirĆ©es est ici solidaire du contre-peigne 8 avec lequel elle constitue un ensemble monolithique . Thus the window of the blade holder 4 through which oscillates the suction blade 400 is covered over more than half of its length by a thin wall 800 disposed between the inner face of the corresponding cap and the blade holder supporting said blade 400. The thin wall 800 which is positioned beyond the space swept by the aspirated blade 400 as it oscillates constitutes a deflector intended as much to direct the air flows towards the free end portion of the blade as to to oppose the leakage of air sucked or blown between the longitudinal edges of said sound blade and the corresponding edges of the relevant window arranged in the blade holder thereby rendering superfluous the installation of additional sealing devices, referred to as valves which equip the so-called chromatic harmonicas of the prior art. The interest of the deflectors described above is all the greater as it allows to achieve a harmonica particularly leakproof air without requiring the use of expensive valves and tedious maintenance, which valves also remove the possibility of use certain game techniques such as blast and suraspirations to obtain particular notes that are interesting in terms of approval and expressiveness while these particular techniques are used with a harmonica equipped with baffles according to the invention. In the embodiment shown in Figures 1 to 23 The deflector blade 800 associated with the aspirated blades is here secured to the counter-comb 8 with which it forms a monolithic assembly.
Pour atteindre les mĆŖmes objectifs que ci avant exposĆ©, une lame-dĆ©flecteur 700 positionnĆ©e au delĆ  de l'espace balayĆ© par la lame soufflĆ©e 500 et s'Ć©tendant elle aussi sur plus de la moitiĆ© de la longueur de la fenĆŖtre concernĆ©e Ć  Ć©tĆ© disposĆ©e Ć  Ī“ intĆ©rieur du canal de circulation d'air concernĆ© et elle constitue ici un ensemble monolithique avec le peigne 7 lui-mĆŖme. II est important de noter que l'un des objectifs particuliers de la conception originale de l'harmonica selon l'invention est d'obtenir un instrument rapidement entiĆØrement dĆ©montable sans outils tels que tournevis clef ou pince nĆ©cessaire avec les harmonicas de l'art antĆ©rieur . Pour cette raison d'une part les porte-lames ne sont pas solidarisĆ©s aux peigne par vissage selon la mĆ©thode classique mais ils sont pris en sandwich entre les faces internes du contre-peigne et les faces externes correspondantes du peigne et d'autre part les vis de solidarisation de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 sont moletĆ©es pour pouvoir ĆŖtre actionnĆ©es Ć  la main tandis que dans les tĆŖtes des vis de fixation des capots 10 sont amĆ©nagĆ©es des fentes d'une largeur supĆ©rieur Ć  un millimĆØtre et demi qui permettent soit de les entraĆ®ner en vissage ou en dĆ©vissage Ć  l'aide de l'ongle du pouce soit de les entraĆ®ner Ć  l'aide d'une simple piĆØce de monnaie que tout le monde a au fond de sa poche . Une telle disposition prĆ©sente de multiple avantages pour l'utilisateur qui peut ainsi accĆ©der facilement directement aux lames sonores aussi bien pour le nettoyage que pour la maintenance ou pour un rĆ©glage de derniĆØre minute avant d'entrer sur scĆØne . Par ailleurs , comme le montrent les diffĆ©rentes vues et coupes illustrant ce premier mode de rĆ©alisation de l'harmonica selon l'invention, la disposition des porte-lames 4 et 5 a Ć©tĆ© inversĆ©e par rapport Ć  la disposition classique dans laquelle, lorsque l'instrument est en position de jeu le porte-lames supportant les lames aspirĆ©es est disposĆ© dans la partie infĆ©rieure de l'instrument tandis que le porte-lames supportant les lames soufflĆ©es est disposĆ© dans la partie supĆ©rieure de l'instrument alors que dans l'harmonica reprĆ©sentĆ© sur ces vues , lorsque l'instrument est en position de jeu , le porte-lames 4 supportant les lames aspirĆ©es 400 est disposĆ© dans la partie supĆ©rieure de l'instrument tandis que le porte-lames 5 supportant les lames soufflĆ©es 500 est disposĆ© dans la partie infĆ©rieure de l'instrument . . La disposition inversĆ©e dans laquelle sont ici implantĆ©s les porte-lames 4 et 5 permet en effet de faciliter grandement l'Ć©vacuation directement vers l'extĆ©rieur de l'instrument de la salive et des micro-dĆ©tritus alors qu'avec la disposition classique ceux-ci se retrouvent piĆ©gĆ©s dans le cul-de-sac constituĆ© par le fond du canal d'oĆ¹ ils ne peuvent s'Ć©chapper Ć  cause de la zone fermĆ©e en angle aiguĆ« constituĆ©e par la partie fixe de la lame aspirĆ©e disposĆ©e en partie basse du canal concernĆ©. A contrario, la disposition inversĆ©e proposĆ©e permet auxdits dĆ©chets d'ĆŖtre facilement Ć©vacuĆ©s vers l'extĆ©rieur au travers de la fenĆŖtre du porte-lame dans laquelle oscille la partie libre de la lame soufflĆ©e concernĆ©e qui se retrouve disposĆ©e en partie basse de l'instrument et cette Ć©vacuation vers l'extĆ©rieur se fait d'autant plus efficacement qu'elle est assurĆ©e par l'effet auto-nettoyant conjuguĆ© de la gravitĆ©, des flux d'air soufflĆ©s et des oscillations de la lame soufflĆ©e . To achieve the same objectives as before exposed, a blade-deflector 700 positioned beyond the space swept by the blown blade 500 and also extending over more than half the length of the window concerned has been disposed to Inside the air circulation channel concerned and it is here a monolithic assembly with the comb 7 itself. It is important to note that one of the particular objectives of the original design of the harmonica according to the invention is to obtain an instrument that can be quickly completely dismounted without tools such as a key screwdriver or clamp necessary with the harmonicas of the prior art. . For this reason, on the one hand, the blade holders are not secured to the comb by screwing according to the conventional method, but they are sandwiched between the internal faces of the comb and the corresponding outer faces of the comb and on the other hand the screws for securing the mouthpiece element 2 are knurled in order to be actuated by hand while in the heads of the fastening screws of the hoods 10 are provided slots of a width greater than one millimeter and a half which allow either to train them by screwing or unscrewing with the help of a thumbnail or to train them with a simple coin that everyone has at the bottom of his pocket. Such an arrangement has multiple advantages for the user who can thus easily access directly to the sound blades for both cleaning and maintenance or for a last minute adjustment before entering the scene. Moreover, as shown by the different views and sections illustrating this first embodiment of the harmonica according to the invention, the arrangement of the blade holders 4 and 5 has been reversed with respect to the conventional arrangement in which, when the instrument is in play position the blade holder supporting the suction blades is disposed in the lower part of the instrument while the blade holder supporting the blown blades is disposed in the upper part of the instrument while in the harmonica shown in these views, when the instrument is in play position, the blade holder 4 supporting the suction blades 400 is disposed in the upper part of the instrument while the blade holder 5 supporting the blown blades 500 is disposed in the lower part of the instrument. . The inverted arrangement in which the blade holders 4 and 5 are implanted here makes it possible to greatly facilitate the evacuation directly to the outside of the instrument of saliva and micro-detritus whereas with the conventional arrangement those they find themselves trapped in the cul-de-sac formed by the bottom of the canal from which they can not escape to because of the closed area at acute angle constituted by the fixed part of the suction blade arranged in the lower part of the channel concerned. Conversely, the proposed inverted arrangement allows said waste to be easily discharged to the outside through the window of the blade holder in which oscillates the free portion of the blown blade concerned which is located at the bottom of the instrument and this evacuation to the outside is all the more effective because it is provided by the self-cleaning effect conjugate gravity, blown air flow and oscillations of the blown blade.
La figure 17 regroupe diffĆ©rentes vues et coupes illustrant un mode de rĆ©alisation particuliers des porte-lames dont les zones dans lesquelles sont rĆ©alisĆ©es les fenĆŖtres au travers desquelles oscillent les lames sonores sont d'Ć©paisseur dĆ©croissante par paliers lorsque l'on va des lames graves aux lames aiguĆ«s . Ainsi , dans la zone concernĆ©e par les six premiĆØres lames graves de chacun des deux porte-lames, l'Ć©paisseur e1 est plus importante que ne l'est l'Ć©paisseur e4 desdits porte-lames mesurĆ©e au niveau des lames aiguĆ«s . Cependant pour assurer une meilleure rigiditĆ© desdits porte-lames en garantissant ainsi la planĆ©itĆ© de leur face d'appui venant reposer contre le peigne , on notera que les amincissement sus-mentionnĆ©s ne concernent pas la partie des porte-lames situĆ©e du cotĆ© de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument , laquelle partie conserve ici toute son Ć©paisseur initiale e1 pour constituer une poutre rectiligne . FIG. 17 groups together different views and sections illustrating a particular embodiment of the blade holders whose areas in which the windows are made through which the sound waves oscillate are of decreasing thickness in steps when going from the serious blades to sharp blades. Thus, in the area concerned by the first six blades of each of the two blade carriers, the thickness e1 is greater than the thickness e4 of said blade carriers measured at the sharp blades. However, to ensure a better rigidity of said blade-holders thus guaranteeing the flatness of their bearing surface coming to rest against the comb, it will be noted that the thinning above-mentioned does not concern the part of the blade holder located on the side of the face mouthpiece of the instrument, which part here retains its full thickness e1 to form a straight beam.
Les figures 18 et 19 montrent en perspective Ć©clatĆ©e l'harmonica reprĆ©sentĆ© sur les figures 1 Ć  23 . Les figures 20 Ć  23 montrent plus en dĆ©tail la conception particuliĆØre de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 et du distributeur 6 correspondant au mode de rĆ©alisation illustrĆ© sur les figures prĆ©cĆ©dentes . Tel que montrĆ© sur la figure 20 et sur la vue agrandie 21 le distributeur d'air 6 occupe sa premiĆØre position, dite sortie au maximum , et pour chacun des trous d'embouchure que comporte l'harmonica un l'Ć©lĆ©ment 60 dudit distributeur tout Ć  la fois bouche l'entrĆ©e du canal 31 et dirige les flux d'air en direction du canal 30 en dĆ©tournant progressivement ceux-ci vers ledit canal 30 avec le moins de perte de force et de vitesse desdits flux grĆ¢ce Ć  la forme inclinĆ©e curviligne convexe de ses flancs venant se placer dans le prolongement des flancs inclinĆ©s curviligne concaves correspondants de l'Ć©lĆ©ment transversal 201 concernĆ© sĆ©parant deux trous d'embouchure contigus 200 . Figures 18 and 19 show exploded perspective the harmonica shown in Figures 1 to 23. Figures 20 to 23 show in more detail the particular design of the mouthpiece element 2 and the distributor 6 corresponding to the embodiment illustrated in the preceding figures. As shown in FIG. 20 and in the enlarged view 21, the air distributor 6 occupies its first position, said outlet at the maximum, and for each of the mouth holes that the harmonica comprises the element 60 of said distributor both muzzle the inlet of the channel 31 and directs the air flows towards the channel 30 by gradually diverting them to said channel 30 with the least loss of strength and speed of said flows through the curvilinear inclined shape convex side of its flanks being placed in the extension of the corresponding concave curvilinear inclined flanks of the transverse element 201 concerned separating two contiguous mouth holes 200.
La figure 22 et la vue agrandie correspondante 23 montrent le cheminement des flux d'air lorsque l'harmoniciste exerce un appui sur le bouton de commande du distributeur d'air 6 amenant celui-ci dans sa seconde position, dite rentrĆ©e , dans laquelle l'Ć©lĆ©ment transversal 60 se retrouve positionnĆ© de telle maniĆØre qu'il bouche l'entrĆ©e du canal 30 et qu'il dirige les flux d'air vers le canal 31 . De part la forme symĆ©trique de ses faces latĆ©rales inclinĆ©es en forme gĆ©nĆ©rale de diĆØdre ouvert en direction du pavillon de l'instrument , l'Ć©lĆ©ment transversal 60 est de section transversale globalement triangulaire et sa forme est donc globalement prismatique Ć  trois faces sur toute sa longueur et par ailleurs chacun desdits Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 est associĆ© Ć  un seul trou d'embouchure qui lui est propre . FIG. 22 and the corresponding enlarged view 23 show the path of the air flows when the harmonicist presses on the control knob of the air distributor 6 bringing it into its second position, said retracted, in which the transverse element 60 is positioned so that it blocks the inlet of the channel 30 and directs the air flow to the channel 31. Due to the symmetrical shape of its inclined lateral faces in general dihedral shape open towards the flag of the instrument, the transverse element 60 is of generally triangular cross section and its shape is therefore generally prismatic three-sided over its entire length and furthermore each of said transverse members 60 is associated with a single mouth hole of its own.
Tel que le montrent ces quatre figures 20 Ć  23, chacune des deux faces latĆ©rales de chacun des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 est inclinĆ©e selon l'angle Ī» par rapport au plan qui passe par l'axe longitudinal du canal concernĆ© ledit plan Ć©tant par ailleurs disposĆ© perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal Px de symĆ©trie gĆ©nĆ©rale de l'instrument . Les deux faces latĆ©rales inclinĆ©es sont de forme curviligne convexe complĆ©mentaire avec les faces d'appui curvilignes concaves correspondantes de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure de telle maniĆØre que lorsque ces faces sont en contact entre elles , elles s'Ć©pousent au maximum pour garantir une parfaite Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© Ć  l'air en Ć©vitant ainsi des fuites d'air parasites . As shown in these four figures 20 to 23, each of the two lateral faces of each of the transverse elements 60 is inclined at the angle Ī» with respect to the plane passing through the longitudinal axis of the channel concerned, said plane being otherwise perpendicularly disposed. in the longitudinal plane Px of general symmetry of the instrument. The two inclined lateral faces are of convex curvilinear shape complementary with the corresponding concave curvilinear bearing faces of the mouthpiece element so that when these faces are in contact with each other, they marry to the maximum to guarantee a perfect airtightness thus avoiding parasitic air leaks.
Selon un mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de rĆ©alisation , l'angle Ī» , ouvert en direction de l'embouchure de l'instrument , est supĆ©rieur Ć  10Ā° ( dix degrĆ©s ) de prĆ©fĆ©rence supĆ©rieur Ć  15Ā° ( quinze degrĆ©s ) et en particulier supĆ©rieur Ć  20Ā° ( vingt degrĆ©s ) According to a preferred embodiment, the angle Ī», open towards the mouth of the instrument, is greater than 10 Ā° (ten degrees) preferably greater than 15 Ā° (fifteen degrees) and in particular greater than 20 Ā° (twenty degrees)
Pour parfaire encore l'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© face aux fuites d'air parasites la face infĆ©rieure de chacun des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60, disposĆ©e sensiblement parallĆØlement Ć  la face d'embouchure, comporte au niveau de ses deux arĆŖtes infĆ©rieures des petits retours 600 et 600 en proĆ©minence par rapport Ć  ladite face infĆ©rieure de telle maniĆØre que l'arĆŖte extrĆŖme desdits retours est plus Ć©loignĆ©e de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument que ne l'est l'arĆŖte extrĆŖme de la paroi sĆ©parant entre eux deux canaux adjacents de circulation d'air alimentĆ© par un trou d'embouchure commun 200 . To further perfect the seal against parasitic air leaks the lower face of each of the transverse elements 60, disposed substantially parallel to the mouth face, has at its two lower edges small returns 600 and 600 in prominence by relative to said lower face so that the extreme edge of said returns is further away from the mouth face of the instrument than is the extreme edge of the wall separating between them two adjacent flow channels of Air supplied by a common mouth hole 200.
Chacun desdits retours 600 se prolonge sur toute la longueur des deux arĆŖtes latĆ©rales infĆ©rieure dudit Ć©lĆ©ment 60 pour constituer une lĆØvre d'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© venant se caler contre la face correspondante de la partie supĆ©rieure de la paroi sĆ©parant deux canaux de circulation d'air alimentĆ©s par le mĆŖme trou d'embouchure . Lorsque l'Ć©lĆ©ment transversal 60 occupe l'une de ses deux positions extrĆŖmes , le becquet d'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© concernĆ© 600 vient se loger dans une feuillure de forme complĆ©mentaire audit becquet amĆ©nagĆ©e dans la partie supĆ©rieure de ladite paroi de sĆ©paration de faƧon Ć  prĆ©senter une Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© maximale par effet de chicanes face aux fuites d'air parasites . Egalement pour Ć©viter toute fuite d'air entre deux canaux voisins , comme le montre la figure 21 les extrĆ©mitĆ©s des parois sĆ©parant deux canaux voisins alimentĆ©s par deux trous d'embouchures diffĆ©rents viennent s'emboĆ®ter dans des fentes de forme complĆ©mentaire ajustĆ©e rĆ©alisĆ©es dans la face arriĆØre de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 201 et, pour ce faire, les extrĆ©mitĆ©s desdites parois se situent Ć  une distance d de la face d'embouchure infĆ©rieure Ć  la distance D sĆ©parant ladite face d'embouchure de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© supĆ©rieure des parois sĆ©parant entre eux deux canaux d'air 30 et 31 alimentĆ©s par un mĆŖme trou d'embouchure. Each of said returns 600 is extended over the entire length of the two lower side edges of said element 60 to form a sealing lip which is wedged against the corresponding face of the upper part of the wall separating two air circulation channels fed by the same mouth hole. When the transverse element 60 occupies one of its two extreme positions, the relevant sealing spoiler 600 is housed in a rabbet of complementary shape to said spoiler arranged in the upper part of said partition wall so as to provide a seal maximum effect by baffles against parasitic air leaks. Also to prevent air leakage between two adjacent channels, as shown in Figure 21, the ends of the walls separating two neighboring channels fed by two different mouth holes are nested in slots of complementary shape fitted in the face rearward of the mouthpiece member 201 and, for this purpose, the ends of said walls are situated at a distance d from the mouth face which is less than the distance D separating said mouth face from the upper end of the dividing walls. between them two air channels 30 and 31 fed by the same mouth hole.
On remarque Ć©galement sur ces figures 20 Ć  23 que la paroi sĆ©parant entre eux deux canaux 30 et 31 alimentĆ©s par un trou d'embouchure commun est plus Ć©paisse que la paroi sĆ©parant entre deux canaux alimentĆ©s par deux trous d'embouchure diffĆ©rents et ce dans le but de disposer d'une largeur suffisante pour pouvoir amĆ©nager dans la partie supĆ©rieure de la paroi Ć©paisse les feuillure d'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© susmentionnĆ©es . Cette diffĆ©rence d'Ć©paisseur desdites parois se traduit Ć©galement par le fait que la distance sĆ©parant les bords longitudinaux adjacents de deux lames voisines alimentĆ©es par un mĆŖme trou d'embouchure est supĆ©rieure Ć  la distance sĆ©parant les deux bords longitudinaux contigus de deux lames adjacentes alimentĆ©s par deux trous d'embouchures diffĆ©rents. It is also noted in these Figures 20 to 23 that the wall separating between them two channels 30 and 31 fed by a common mouth hole is thicker than the wall separating between two channels fed by two different mouth holes and this in the to have a sufficient width to be able to develop in the upper part of the thick wall the aforementioned sealing rabbet. This difference in thickness of said walls is also reflected in the fact that the distance separating the adjacent longitudinal edges of two adjacent blades fed by the same mouth hole is greater than the distance separating the two contiguous longitudinal edges of two adjacent blades fed by two different mouths.
Dans ce mode de rƩalisation , reprƩsentƩ sur les figures 20 Ơ 23 aussi bien que dans les variantes reprƩsentƩes sur les figures 24 Ơ 27 , l'ƩtanchƩitƩ entre les ƩlƩments transversaux 60 du distributeur 6 et les ƩlƩments transversaux 201 de l'ƩlƩment d'embouchure 2 est donc assurƩe latƩralement par le contact Ʃtroit et donc Ʃtanche entre les faces latƩrales concernƩes desdits ƩlƩments 60 et 201 et non pas par le contact entre la face sommitale des ƩlƩments transversaux 60 du distributeur d'air 6 contre la face infƩrieure correspondante des ƩlƩments transversaux 201 de l'ƩlƩment d'embouchure 2 comme c'est le cas pour les autres modes de rƩalisation reprƩsentƩs sur les figures 28 Ơ 31 . In this embodiment, shown in Figures 20 to 23 as well as in the variants shown in Figures 24 to 27, the seal between the transverse elements 60 of the distributor 6 and the transverse elements 201 of the mouthpiece element 2 is thus ensured laterally by the close and therefore tight contact between the relevant lateral faces of said elements 60 and 201 and not by the contact between the top face of the transverse elements 60 of the air distributor 6 against the corresponding lower face of the transverse elements. 201 of the mouth member 2 as is the case for the other embodiments shown in Figures 28 to 31.
Les figures 24 Ć  29 sont des coupes transversales partielles montrant d'autres modes de rĆ©alisation des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 201 de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 et des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 du distributeur d'air 6 . Chaque mode de rĆ©alisation est illustrĆ© par une figure montrant la position occupĆ©e par lesdits Ć©lĆ©ments 201 et 60 lorsque ledit distributeur d'air occupe sa position sortie et par une autre figure dans laquelle ledit distributeur d'air occupe sa position rentrĆ©e. Ces modes de rĆ©alisation diffĆØrent du mode de rĆ©alisation reprĆ©sentĆ© sur les figures prĆ©cĆ©dentes en ce que les faces de contact entre l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 et les Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 sont planes mais ils prĆ©sentent tous en commun l'intĆ©rĆŖt de comporter des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 de forme globalement profilĆ©e et dont la largeur, mesurĆ©e dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument , est globalement dĆ©gressive au fur et Ć  mesure que l'on s'Ć©loigne de leur face situĆ©e la plus proche du pavillon de l'instrument pour se rapprocher de leur face situĆ©e la plus proche de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument. Figures 24 to 29 are partial cross-sections showing further embodiments of the transverse members 201 of the mouthpiece member 2 and the transverse members 60 of the air distributor 6. Each embodiment is illustrated by a figure showing the position occupied by said elements 201 and 60 when said air distributor occupies its extended position and by another figure in which said air distributor occupies its retracted position. These embodiments differ from the embodiment shown in the preceding figures in that the contact faces between the mouthpiece element 2 and the transverse elements 60 are flat, but they all have in common the interest of having transverse elements. 60 of generally shaped shape and whose width, measured in the longitudinal direction of the instrument, is generally degressive as one moves away from their face closest to the flag of the instrument to get closer to their face located closest to the mouth of the instrument.
En effet les plans passant par les faces latĆ©rales desdits Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 constituent un diĆØdre ouvert en direction du pavillon de l'instrument selon l'angle moyen respectivement , Ī² ce qui revient Ć  dire que les plans passant par les faces latĆ©rales inclinĆ©es 601 , 601 situĆ©es en vis-Ć -vis l'une de l'autre de deux Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 voisins constituent un diĆØdre Ć©galement de valeur respectives Ī± , Ī² mais qui, lui, est ouvert en direction de l'embouchure de l'instrument . les faces latĆ©rales inclinĆ©es de deux Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux voisins constituent donc une trĆ©mie dirigeant efficacement les flux d'air vers le canal de circulation d'air sĆ©lectionnĆ© et ce aussi bien lorsque le distributeur d'air 6 occupe sa position "sortie" que sa position "rentrĆ©e" .Cette configuration en forme de trĆ©mie des faces latĆ©rales 601 des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 du distributeur d'air 6 est par ailleurs renforcĆ©e dans son efficacitĆ© par la configuration en forme de trĆ©mie inversĆ©e des flancs inclinĆ©s 2010,2010 du trou d'embouchure200 correspondant dont les plans constituent ici un diĆØdre de valeur angulaire Ī³ ouvert en direction du pavillon de l'instrument . L'inclinaison des faces latĆ©rales 601 ,601 des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 du distributeur d'air 6 est sensiblement identique Ć  celle des faces latĆ©rale 2010,2010 des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 201 de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 ce qui permet d'une part d'Ć©largir de faƧon optimale le passage empruntĆ© par les flux d'air aspirĆ©s ou soufflĆ©s amĆ©nagĆ© entre la face d'embouchure et la face infĆ©rieure du distributeur d'air 6 et d'autre part d'optimiser l'Ć©coulement desdits flux en crĆ©ant le moins de turbulences possibles et le moins de phĆ©nomĆØnes de cavitation contrairement Ć  ce que subissent les flux d'air dans les harmonicas de l'art antĆ©rieur dont les amĆ©nagements correspondants comportent des changements de direction Ć  angle droit qui se traduisent par des pertes importantes de vitesse et de force des flux d'air et donc au final par un plus long dĆ©lai de rĆ©ponse ou de rĆ©activitĆ© dans la mise en oscillation des lames . Ā Indeed, the planes passing through the lateral faces of said transverse elements 60 constitute a dihedron open towards the flag of the instrument according to the average angle respectively, Ī² which amounts to saying that the planes passing through the inclined lateral faces 601, 601 located opposite each other of two neighboring transverse elements 60 are a dihedral also of respective value Ī±, Ī² but which is open towards the mouth of the instrument. the inclined lateral faces of two neighboring transverse elements therefore constitute a hopper effectively directing the air flows towards the selected air circulation channel and this as well when the air distributor 6 occupies its "out" position as its position " This hopper-shaped configuration of the side faces 601 of the transverse members 60 of the air distributor 6 is further reinforced in its efficiency by the inverted hopper-shaped configuration of the inclined flanks 2010,2010 of the corresponding mouth hole 200. whose planes here constitute a dihedral angular value Ī³ open towards the flag of the instrument. The inclination of the lateral faces 601, 601 of the transverse elements 60 of the air distributor 6 is substantially identical to that of the lateral faces 2010,2010 of the transverse elements 201 of the mouthpiece element 2, which allows, on the one hand, optimally widening the passage taken by the sucked or blown air flows arranged between the mouth face and the underside of the air distributor 6 and secondly optimizing the flow of said flows by creating the less possible turbulence and the least cavitation phenomena unlike that experienced by the air flows in the harmonicas of the prior art whose corresponding arrangements include changes in direction at right angles which result in significant loss of speed and forcibly air flows and therefore ultimately by a longer response time or responsiveness in the oscillation of the blades.
Les figures 26 et 27 montrent un mode de rĆ©alisation dans lequel les faces latĆ©rales des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 201 de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 disposĆ©s perpendiculairement Ć  l'axe longitudinal de l'instrument comportent des dĆ©crochements en creux de dimensions complĆ©mentaires aux formes et aux dimensions des faces latĆ©rales correspondantes des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 du distributeur d'air 6 de telle maniĆØre que lorsque le distributeur d'air 6 occupe sa position complĆØtement rentrĆ©e ou sa position complĆØtement sortie lesdites faces latĆ©rales respectives viennent en contact Ć©troit l'une contre l'autre en s'Ć©pousant aussi bien au niveau de leur faces latĆ©rales inclinĆ©es respectives qu'au niveau de la facette horizontale supĆ©rieure des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 du distributeur d'air . Ces dĆ©crochements , ou redans, constituent ainsi des chicanes transversales garantissant une Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© optimale face aux fuites d'air parasites et ce grĆ¢ce Ć  ces contacts Ć©troits entre lesdits Ć©lĆ©ments 201 et 60 aussi bien dans le plan horizontal de coulissement du distributeur 6 que dans des plans inclinĆ©s selon les facettes latĆ©rales concernĆ©es . FIGS. 26 and 27 show an embodiment in which the lateral faces of the transverse elements 201 of the mouthpiece element 2 arranged perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the instrument comprise recesses with recesses of dimensions complementary to the shapes and dimensions of the corresponding lateral faces of the transverse elements 60 of the air distributor 6 so that when the air distributor 6 occupies its fully retracted position or its fully extended position, said respective lateral faces come into close contact with one another against the another marrying as well at their respective inclined lateral faces as at the level of the upper horizontal facet of the transverse elements 60 of the air distributor. These recesses, or steps, thus constitute transverse baffles guaranteeing an optimal seal against parasitic air leakage and thanks to these close contacts between said elements 201 and 60 both in the horizontal sliding plane of the distributor 6 and in inclined planes according to the lateral facets concerned.
Les figures 30 et 31 montrent une variante de rĆ©alisation dans laquelleles faces latĆ©rales 602 des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 du distrubuteur 6 prĆ©sentent une double courbure dont la partie infĆ©rieure situĆ©e la plus proche du pavillon est convexe tandis que la partie supĆ©rieure situĆ©e la plus proche de l'embouchure est concave . Les deux plans moyens passant par les faces latĆ©rales inclinĆ©es des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 du distributeur 6 constituent un diĆØdre de valeur angulaire Ī“ ouvert en direction du pavillon de l'instrument tandis que les deux plans moyens passant par les faces latĆ©rales inclinĆ©es des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 201 sĆ©parant deux trous d'embouchures contigus sont concourants et constituent un diĆØdre de valeur angulaire Īµ ouvert en direction de l'embouchure de l'instrument . FIGS. 30 and 31 show an alternative embodiment in which the lateral faces 602 of the transverse elements 60 of the distrubutor 6 have a double curvature, the lower part of which is closest to the horn is convex while the upper part is closest to the horn. mouthpiece is concave. The two mean planes passing through the inclined lateral faces of the transverse elements 60 of the distributor 6 constitute a dihedral of angular value Ī“ open towards the flag of the instrument while the two mean planes passing through the inclined lateral faces of the transverse elements 201 separating two contiguous mouth holes are concurrent and constitute a dihedral of angular value Īµ open towards the mouth of the instrument.
La figure 32 montre deux vues en perspective de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 et du distributeur d'air 6 correspondant au mode de rĆ©alisation illustrĆ© par les figures 28 et 29. II faut noter que les configurations dĆ©crites ci-avant en correspondance des figures 28 Ć  31 offrent d'une part l'avantage d'une course en translation trĆØs rĆ©duite du distributeur d'air 6 pour passer de sa position sortie Ć  sa position rentrĆ©e et inversement et d'autre part l'avantage de garantir en tous points de la course dudit distributeur une Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© permanente entre deux canaux d'air voisins alimentĆ©s par deux trous d'embouchure diffĆ©rents . En effet tout au long de la course de glissement du distributeur d'air 6 la face supĆ©rieure de chacun des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux 60 reste constamment en contact avec la face infĆ©rieure correspondante de l'Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure 2 Ć©vitant ainsi tout passage d'air trĆØs prĆ©judiciable entre deux canaux voisins alimentĆ©s par deux trous d'air diffĆ©rents comme c'est le cas avec les harmonicas de l'art antĆ©rieur dont les fenĆŖtres amĆ©nagĆ©es au travers de la lame constituant le distributeur d'air se dĆ©place d'un canal d'air au canal voisin alimentĆ© par un autre trou d'embouchure en mettant ainsi malencontreusement en communication lesdits canaux lorsque le distributeur d'air est Ć  mi-course . FIG. 32 shows two perspective views of the mouthpiece element 2 and of the air distributor 6 corresponding to the embodiment illustrated by FIGS. 28 and 29. It should be noted that the configurations described above in correspondence with FIGS. 28 to 31, on the one hand, have the advantage of a very reduced translational travel of the air distributor 6 to move from its extended position to its retracted position and vice versa and, on the other hand, the advantage of guaranteeing in all respects the race of said distributor a permanent seal between two neighboring air channels fed by two different mouth holes. Indeed throughout the sliding path of the air distributor 6 the upper face of each of the transverse elements 60 is constantly in contact with the corresponding lower face of the mouthpiece member 2 thus avoiding any air passage very detrimental between two neighboring channels powered by two different air holes as is the case with the harmonicas of the prior art whose windows arranged through the blade constituting the air distributor moves a channel of air to the neighboring channel fed by another mouth hole thereby inadvertently communicating said channels when the air distributor is halfway.
La figure 33 montre un mode de rĆ©alisation particulier dans lequel les faces du peigne contre lesquelles prennent appui les porte-lames sont parallĆØles entre elles . La figure 33 bis est une coupe de la figure 33 selon le repĆØre RR avec des arrachements localisĆ©s du becquet 701 permettant de voir les tĆŖtes de vis de fixation des dĆ©flecteurs 16 . La figure 33 ter est une vue de face d'une partie du porte-lames 5 . Figure 33 shows a particular embodiment in which the faces of the comb against which bear the blade holders are parallel to each other. 33a is a cross-section of FIG. 33 according to the RR mark with localized detachments of the spoiler 701 making it possible to see the fastening screw heads of the deflectors 16. Figure 33b is a front view of a portion of the blade holder 5.
Chacune des lames sonores est solidarisĆ©e au porte-lames correspondant en Ć©tant prise en sandwich entre la face dudit porte-lame et un Ć©lĆ©ment rapportĆ© constituant un dĆ©flecteur 15 , 16 solidarisĆ© Ć  ce porte-lame par une vis et un Ć©crou . Ā Each of the sound blades is secured to the corresponding blade holder by being sandwiched between the face of said blade holder and an insert member constituting a deflector 15, 16 secured to the blade holder by a screw and a nut.
Pour Ć©viter le dĆ©vissage total de la vis et de l'Ć©crou solidarisant le dĆ©flecteur 16 et la lame soufflĆ©e correspondante au porte-lames soufflĆ© 5 , le peigne comporte un becquet 701 recouvrant partiellement au moins la tĆŖte de ladite vis tandis que le capot 10 correspondant recouvre lui l'Ć©crou qui, ainsi, ne peut pas, lui non plus, s'Ć©chapper . De la mĆŖme maniĆØre pour Ć©viter le dĆ©vissage total de la vis et de l'Ć©crou solidarisant le dĆ©flecteur 15 et la lame aspirĆ©e correspondante au porte-lames aspirĆ© 4 , le peigne comporte un second becquet 702 recouvrant partiellement au moins la tĆŖte de la vis concernĆ©e tandis qu'un becquet 82 recouvrant partiellement au moins l'Ć©crou est amĆ©nagĆ© dans un Ć©lĆ©ment rapportĆ© 800 maintenu plaquĆ© contre le porte-lames 4 par l'une les vis assurant la fixation et le placage des deux porte-lames 4 et 5 contre les faces correspondantes du peigne 7 . Ā To avoid the total unscrewing of the screw and the nut securing the baffle 16 and the blown blade corresponding to the bladed blade holder 5, the comb comprises a spoiler 701 partially covering at least the head of said screw while the corresponding cap 10 cover him the nut which, thus, can not escape him either. In the same way to prevent the total unscrewing of the screw and the nut securing the deflector 15 and the sucked blade corresponding to the aspirated blade holder 4, the comb comprises a second spoiler 702 partially covering at least the head of the screw concerned while a spoiler 82 partially covering at least the nut is formed in an attached element 800 held pressed against the blade holder 4 by one of the screws ensuring the fixing and the plating of the two blade holders 4 and 5 against the corresponding faces of the comb 7.
La coupe transversale de la figure 33 montre que dans ce mode de rĆ©alisation le peigne occupe une position dĆ©centrĆ©e dans le sens latĆ©ral par rapport Ć  l'embouchure donc par rapport au plan longitudinal moyen Px alors mĆŖme que ladite embouchure aussi bien que les faces extĆ©rieures des deux capots sont disposĆ©es symĆ©triquement par rapport audit plan longitudinal moyen Px . Cette disposition dĆ©centrĆ©e des porte-lames exploite bĆ©nĆ©fiquement le fait que le porte-lames 4 supportant toutes les lames aspirĆ©es de l'instrument impose de disposer de davantage d'espace entre la face intĆ©rieure du capot correspondant et la face extĆ©rieure du porte-lames 4 contre laquelle sont fixĆ©es lesdites lames aspirĆ©es alors qu'Ć  contrario les lames soufflĆ©es supportĆ©es par le porte-lames 5 Ć©tant fixĆ©es contre la face intĆ©rieur dudit porte-lames 5 peuvent, pour leurs oscillations ,se satisfaire d'un espace plus rĆ©duit entre la face extĆ©rieure dudit porte-lames 5 et la face intĆ©rieure du capot correspondant . La face du peigne 7 contre laquelle s'appuie le porte-lames 4 supportant les lames aspirĆ©es 400 est donc positionnĆ©e Ć  une distance D2 dudit plan longitudinal moyen Px infĆ©rieure Ć  la distance D1 Ć  laquelle est situĆ©e la face du peigne 7 contre laquelle s'appuie le porte-lames 5 supportant les lames soufflĆ©es 500 . The cross-section of FIG. 33 shows that in this embodiment the comb occupies a position that is off-center in the lateral direction with respect to the mouthpiece and therefore with respect to the mean longitudinal plane Px even though said mouth as well as the outer faces of the two covers are arranged symmetrically with respect to said mean longitudinal plane Px. This off-center arrangement of the blade-holders beneficially exploits the fact that the blade-holder 4 supporting all the aspirated blades of the instrument imposes to have more space between the inner face of the corresponding cap and the outer face of the blade-holder 4. against which are fixed said blades sucked whereas contrario the blown blades supported by the blade holder 5 being fixed against the inner face of said blade holder 5 can, for their oscillations, be satisfied with a smaller space between the face outside said blade holder 5 and the inner face of the corresponding cover. The face of the comb 7 against which rests the blade holder 4 supporting the suction blades 400 is therefore positioned at a distance D2 from said mean longitudinal plane Px less than the distance D1 at which the face of the comb 7 against which presses the blade holder 5 supporting the blown blades 500.
Cette disposition originale dĆ©centrĆ©e du peigne permet ainsi de rĆ©aliser un harmonica plus mince ce qui prĆ©sente un grand intĆ©rĆŖt pour la tenue en main de l'instrument comparativement aux harmonicas correspondants de l'art antĆ©rieur . Les dĆ©flecteurs 15 associĆ©s aux lames aspirĆ©es sont positionnĆ©s Ć  l'extĆ©rieur du peigne et donc disposĆ©s entre la face extĆ©rieure du porte-lames 4 et la face intĆ©rieure du capot concernĆ© tandis que les dĆ©flecteurs 16 des lames soufflĆ©s sont disposĆ©s eux , Ć  l'intĆ©rieur du canal de circulation d'air concernĆ© . Les dĆ©flecteurs 15 associĆ©s aux lames aspirĆ©es sont configurĆ©s sous la forme d'un Ć©lĆ©ment fermĆ© sur une partie au moins de la longueur de ses cotĆ©s par des parois latĆ©rales d'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© qui viennent rejoindre la face correspondante du porte-lames 4 en se situant en dehors de l'espace balayĆ© par la lame sonore concernĆ©e tandis que la face centrale dudit dĆ©flecteur 15 disposĆ©e en vis-Ć -vis de la face correspondante de la lame sonore concernĆ©e est situĆ©e au-delĆ  de l'espace balayĆ© par ladite lame sonore lors de ses oscillations maximales de telle maniĆØre que ladite lame sonore ne puisse Ć  aucun moment venir en contact avec l'une ou l'autre des parois intĆ©rieures du dĆ©flecteur 15 . Pour les mĆŖmes raisons ladite face supĆ©rieure du dĆ©flecteur 15 est avantageusement de forme convexe dans le sens longitudinal du canal concernĆ© pour pouvoir tout Ć  la fois Ć©pouser au mieux la forme cambrĆ©e de la lame sonore en mouvement et pour prĆ©senter une face extĆ©rieure aux formes arrondies afin de pĆ©naliser et de perturber le moins possible l'Ć©coulement des filets d'air aspirĆ©s qui longent lesdits dĆ©flecteurs 15 avant de s'engouffrer dans la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille la lame sonore concernĆ©e . This original off-center arrangement of the comb thus makes it possible to produce a thinner harmonica, which is of great interest for holding the instrument in hand compared to the corresponding harmonicas of the prior art. The baffles 15 associated with the suction blades are positioned outside the comb and therefore disposed between the outer face of the blade holder 4 and the inner face of the bonnet concerned while the baffles 16 of the blown blades are arranged inside them. of the air circulation channel concerned. The deflectors 15 associated with the suction blades are configured in the form of a closed element over at least a portion of the length of its sides by lateral sealing walls which come to join the corresponding face of the blade carrier 4 while being in position. outside the space swept by the sound blade concerned while the central face of said deflector 15 disposed vis-a-vis the corresponding face of the sound blade concerned is located beyond the space swept by said sound blade when its maximum oscillations so that said soundblade can not at any time come into contact with one or the other of the inner walls of the deflector 15. For the same reasons, said upper face of the deflector 15 is advantageously of convex shape in the longitudinal direction of the channel concerned so that it can at the same time marry at best the arched shape of the sounding blade in motion and to present an outer face with rounded shapes in order to to penalize and disturb as little as possible the flow of the sucked air streams that run along said deflectors 15 before rushing into the window through which oscillates the sound blade concerned.
Les dĆ©flecteurs 16 associĆ©es aux lames soufflĆ©es sont positionnĆ©s Ć  l'intĆ©rieur des canaux amĆ©nagĆ©s dans le peigne et leur largeur correspond Ć  la largeur desdits canaux . Ce sont les parois latĆ©rales sĆ©parant les canaux entre eux qui assurent l'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© latĆ©rales et les dĆ©flecteurs internes 16 se rĆ©duisent donc Ć  une paroi disposĆ©e hors de l'espace balayĆ© par la lame sonore concernĆ©e lors de ses oscillations . Les dĆ©flecteurs 15 et 16 recouvrent la zone de fixation des lames ainsi que la partie fixe des lames auxquelles ils sont associĆ©s et ils s'Ć©tendent en direction de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre desdites lames aspirĆ©es et soufflĆ©es de telle maniĆØre que leur extrĆ©mitĆ© est situĆ©e respectivement Ć  une distance Da de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© de la fenĆŖtre jouxtant l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame sonore aspirĆ©e concernĆ©e et Ć  une distance Ds de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© de la fenĆŖtre jouxtant l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de lĆ  lame sonore soufflĆ©e concernĆ©e . Ā The deflectors 16 associated with the blown blades are positioned inside the channels arranged in the comb and their width corresponds to the width of said channels. It is the side walls separating the channels between them which ensure the lateral sealing and the internal deflectors 16 are thus reduced to a wall disposed outside the space swept by the sound wave concerned during its oscillations. The baffles 15 and 16 cover the blade attachment area as well as the fixed part of the blades with which they are associated and they extend towards the free end of said blades sucked and blown in such a way that their end is located respectively at a distance Da from the end of the window adjoining the free end of the aspired sound blade concerned and at a distance Ds from the end of the window adjoining the free end of the concerned blown sound blade.
La distance Da Ć©tant infĆ©rieure Ć  la longueur totale La de la fenĆŖtre dans laquelle oscille la lame sonore aspirĆ©e concernĆ©e de mĆŖme que la distance Ds est infĆ©rieure Ć  la longueur totale Ls de la fenĆŖtre dans laquelle oscille la lame sonore soufflĆ©e concernĆ©e . Selon un premier mode de rĆ©alisation la valeur de la distance Da est avantageusement comprise entre le tiers et les deux tiers de la valeur de La et de mĆŖme la valeur de la distance Ds est avantageusement comprise entre le tiers et les deux tiers de la valeur de Ls . The distance Da being less than the total length La of the window in which the aspired sound blade oscillates concerned as well as the distance Ds is less than the total length Ls of the window in which the respective blown sound wave oscillates. According to a first embodiment, the value of the distance Da is advantageously between one-third and two-thirds of the value of La and the value of the Ds distance is advantageously between one third and two thirds of the value of Ls.
Selon un mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de rĆ©alisation la valeur de la distance Da est avantageusement comprise entre le quart et les trois quarts de la valeur de La et de mĆŖme la valeur de la distance Ds est avantageusement comprise entre le quart et les trois quarts de la valeur de Ls . According to a preferred embodiment, the value of the distance Da is advantageously between one-quarter and three-quarters of the value of La and the value of the distance Ds is advantageously between one-quarter and three-quarters of the value of Ls.
Bien-sĆ»r certains au moins sinon la totalitĆ© des dĆ©flecteurs extĆ©rieurs 15 relatifs aux lames aspirĆ©es peuvent ĆŖtre regroupĆ©s en une seule plaque maintenue plaquĆ©e contre la face extĆ©rieure du porte-lames 4 supportant les lames aspirĆ©es par les vis assurant l'assemblage et la fixation du ou des porte-lames contre la ou les faces correspondantes du peigne 7 . Of course, at least some, if not all, of the outer deflectors 15 relating to the suction blades can be grouped together in a single plate held pressed against the outer face of the blade holder 4 supporting the blades sucked by the screws ensuring the assembly and fixation of the or blade holders against the corresponding face or faces of the comb 7.
Les figures 34 Ć  37 montre un autre mode de rĆ©alisation d'un harmonica selon l'invention parmi lesquelles les deux figures 34 et 35 sont des vues extĆ©rieures respectivement de face et de cotĆ© de l'harmonica montĆ© tandis que la figure 36 regroupe diffĆ©rentes vues montrant l'assemblage des diffĆ©rentes piĆØces constituant cet harmonica . Dans ce mode de rĆ©alisation, les capots et la face d'embouchure constituent un ensemble monolithique configurĆ© en une coque pĆ©riphĆ©rique 18 en forme de cloche aplatie ouverte du cotĆ© pavillon de l'instrument et comportant sur la face opposĆ©e constituant la face d'embouchure de l'instrument les trous d'embouchure 200 par lesquels l'harmoniciste aspire ou insuffle de l'air qui met en vibration les lames sonores aspirĆ©es 4 ou soufflĆ©es 5 par l'intermĆ©diaire des canaux de circulation des flux d'air . FIGS. 34 to 37 show another embodiment of a harmonica according to the invention, of which the two figures 34 and 35 are respectively front and side views of the mounted harmonica whereas FIG. showing the assembly of the different pieces constituting this harmonica. In this embodiment, the covers and the mouth face constitute a monolithic assembly configured as a bell-shaped peripheral shell 18 open on the instrument's side and having on the opposite face constituting the mouth face of the mouthpiece. the instrument the mouth holes 200 by which the harmonicist sucks or blows air which vibrates the sound strips sucked 4 or blown 5 through the channels of circulation of air flows.
Une ouverture amĆ©nagĆ©e dans la partie supĆ©rieure de l'une des faces de la coque 18 permet l'introduction du distributeur d'air 6 Ć  l'intĆ©rieur de la coque 18 . Ā An opening arranged in the upper part of one of the faces of the shell 18 allows the introduction of the air distributor 6 inside the shell 18.
AprĆØs que les porte lames 4 et 5 aient Ć©tĆ© montĆ©s sur le peigne et maintenus en place soit par le contre peigne 8 soit par des moyens tels que des clipsages permettant leur montage et dĆ©montage sans outil, le peigne supportant donc dĆ©jĆ  les porte-lames est introduit Ć  l'intĆ©rieur de la coque 18 puis mis en place par coulissement en direction de l'embouchure , son bon positionnement Ć©tant garanti par des moyens de positionnement et de guidage , non reprĆ©sentĆ©s ici, rĆ©alisĆ©s Ć  l'intĆ©rieur de la coque 18 collaborant avec des amĆ©nagements complĆ©mentaires rĆ©alisĆ©s sur le peigne et/ou sur le contre peigne 8 . Il suffit ensuite de mettre en place la lame flexible 9 dont la poussĆ©e en direction de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument assure le maintien en place des diffĆ©rents Ć©lĆ©ments entre eux en garantissant d'une part le minimum de jeu entre la face supĆ©rieure du peigne et la face infĆ©rieur du distributeur coulissant 6 et d'autre part une poussĆ©e suffisante contre le contre peigne 8 pour que celui-ci puisse assurer un placage optimal des porte-lames 4 et 5 contre les faces correspondantes du peigne 7 . After the blade holders 4 and 5 have been mounted on the comb and held in place either by the counter comb 8 or by means such as clipping for mounting and dismounting without tools, the comb thus already supporting the blade holder is introduced inside the hull 18 and then slidably placed in the direction of the mouth, its good positioning being guaranteed by positioning and guiding means, not shown here, made inside the hull 18 collaborating with additional arrangements made on the comb and / or against the comb 8. It is then sufficient to set up the flexible blade 9 whose thrust towards the mouthpiece face of the instrument ensures the maintenance of the various elements between them ensuring on the one hand the minimum clearance between the upper face comb and the lower face of the sliding distributor 6 and secondly a sufficient thrust against the counter comb 8 so that it can ensure optimum veneer of the blade holder 4 and 5 against the corresponding faces of the comb 7.
Pour assurer au contre-peigne 8 une rigiditĆ© suffisante pour qu'il puisse plaquer efficacement les porte-lames contre le peigne 7 , ledit contre-peigne comporte des membrures 80 disposĆ©es de champ par rapport aux faces des portes-lames 4 et 5 lesquelles membrures 80 viennent se positionner au droit des parois de sĆ©paration des canaux en se glissant entre les lames sonores concernĆ©es . Ā To ensure that the counter-comb 8 has sufficient rigidity so that it can effectively press the blade-holders against the comb 7, said counter-comb comprises ribs 80 arranged in the field relative to the faces of the blade-holders 4 and 5 which chords 80 are positioned at the right of the walls of separation of the channels by slipping between the sound waves concerned.
Tel que reprĆ©sentĆ© sur les diffĆ©rentes figures prĆ©cĆ©dentes , chacun des deux porte-lames 4 et 5 ne supporte que des lames du mĆŖme type qui sont des lames aspirĆ©es 400 pour le premier porte-lames 4 et des lames soufflĆ©es 500 pour le second porte-lames 5 autrement dit toutes les lames d'un mĆŖme type que comporte l'harmonica selon l'invention sont montĆ©es sur le mĆŖme porte^lames et cette disposition des lames permet de rĆ©duire bĆ©nĆ©fiquemment l'Ć©paisseur gĆ©nĆ©rale de l'instrument puisque le peigne 7 ainsi donc que les porte-lames et le contre-peigne 8 qu'il supporte peuvent ĆŖtre avantageusement montĆ©s en position dĆ©centrĆ©e par rapport au plan PX de symĆ©trie de la coque . En effet , si il est nĆ©cessaire de mĆ©nager un espace consĆ©quent entre le porte-lames 5 et la face correspondante de l'intĆ©rieur de la coque 18 pour permettre le dĆ©battement de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre des lames aspirĆ©es disposĆ©es Ć  l'extĆ©rieur du porte-lames et tournĆ©es de surcroĆ®t en direction de l'embouchure de l'instrument , Ć  contrario le porte -lames 4 supportant les lames soufflĆ©es peut ĆŖtre, lui , positionnĆ© trĆØs prĆØs de la face intĆ©rieure correspondante de la coque 18 puisque d'une part ces lames soufflĆ©es sont positionnĆ©es Ć  l'intĆ©rieur du peigne et d'autre part leur extrĆ©mitĆ© libre oscillante est tournĆ©e du cotĆ© pavillon de l'instrument . Ceci revient Ć  dire que le peigne 7 ainsi que les porte-lames 4,5 et le contre-peigne 8 qu'il supporte sont dĆ©centrĆ©s dans le sens latĆ©ral par rapport au plan longitudinal moyen Px passant par la mi-Ć©paisseur de l'instrument au niveau de l'embouchure et par la mi- Ć©paisseur de l'instrument au niveau du pavillon , la face du peigne 7 contre laquelle s'appuie le porte-lames 4 supportant les lames aspirĆ©es 400 Ć©tant positionnĆ©e plus prĆØs dudit plan Px que ne l'est la face du peigne 7 contre laquelle s'appuie le porte-lames 5 supportant les lames soufflĆ©es 500 ce qui revient Ć©galement Ć  dire que la face du peigne7 supportant le porte-lames 4 des lames aspirĆ©es 400 est positionnĆ© Ć  une distance de la face intĆ©rieure du capot correspondant supĆ©rieure Ć  la distance Ć  laquelle la face du peigne 7 supportant le porte-lames 5 des lames soufflĆ©es 500 est situĆ©e par rapport Ć  la face intĆ©rieure du capot correspondant . As shown in the various previous figures, each of the two blade holders 4 and 5 only supports blades of the same type which are aspirated blades 400 for the first blade holder 4 and blades 500 blasted for the second blade carrier In other words, all the blades of the same type as the harmonica according to the invention comprises are mounted on the same blade holder and this arrangement of the blades makes it possible to advantageously reduce the overall thickness of the instrument since the comb 7 as well therefore, the blade holders and the counter-comb 8 which it supports can advantageously be mounted in an off-center position with respect to the plane PX of symmetry of the shell. Indeed, if it is necessary to provide a large space between the blade holder 5 and the corresponding face of the interior of the shell 18 to allow the free end of the blades of the aspirated disposed outside of the carrier blades and turns in addition to the mouth of the instrument, contrario the holder-bladders 4 supporting the blown blades can be, him, positioned very close to the corresponding inner face of the shell 18 since on the one hand these Blown blades are positioned inside the comb and on the other hand their oscillating free end is turned to the side of the flag of the instrument. This amounts to saying that the comb 7 as well as the blade holders 4,5 and the counter-comb 8 that it supports are off-center in the lateral direction with respect to the mean longitudinal plane Px passing through the mid-thickness of the instrument. at the mouth and the mid-thickness of the instrument at the flag, the face of the comb 7 against which rests the blade holder 4 supporting the aspirated blades 400 being positioned closer to said plane Px that does not is the face of the comb 7 against which rests the blade holder 5 supporting the blown blades 500 which is also to say that the face of the comb 7 supporting the blade holder 4 of the suction blades 400 is positioned at a distance of the inner face of the corresponding cap greater than the distance at which the face of the comb 7 supporting the blade holder 5 of the blown blades 500 is located relative to the inner face of the corresponding cap.
De la position de montage dƩcentrƩe Ơ l'intƩrieur de la coque 18 telle que ci-avant dƩcrite , il rƩsulte que les membrures 80 du contre-peigne 8 situƩes du cotƩs des lames aspirƩes sont moins hautes que ne le sont les membrures correspondantes situƩes du cotƩ des lames aspirƩes et pour leur assurer une meilleure rigiditƩ en particulier en flexion longitudinale et transversales, cotƩ lames soufflƩes les extrƩmitƩs desdites membrures sont avantageusement reliƩs entre elles par une barrette transversale 81 situƩe au-delƠ de l'espace balayƩ par lesdites lames soufflƩes . From the off-center mounting position inside the shell 18 as described above, it follows that the ribs 80 of the counter-comb 8 located on the sides of the suctioned blades are lower than are the corresponding members located on the side of the blades sucked and to ensure a better rigidity in particular in longitudinal and transverse bending, side blown blades the ends of said frames are advantageously interconnected by a transverse bar 81 located beyond the space swept by said blown blades.
Enfin il faut souligner l'intĆ©rĆŖt tout Ć  fait particulier qu'offre la disposition des canaux telle que dĆ©crite dans les diffĆ©rents modes de rĆ©alisation prĆ©sentĆ©s dans ce document par rapport Ć  la configuration des harmonicas de l'art antĆ©rieur pour ce type d'harmonica avec lequel l'harmoniciste peut accĆ©der Ć  un double registre de notes gĆ©nĆ©ralement dĆ©calĆ©s l'un par rapport Ć  l'autre d'un demi-ton d'oĆ¹ le terme d'harmonica chromatique gĆ©nĆ©ralement utilisĆ© pour dĆ©signer ce type d'instrument . De fait dans les harmonicas chromatiques de l'art antĆ©rieur , les deux lames sonores , l'une de type aspirĆ©e et l'autre de type soufflĆ© , alimentĆ©es lorsque le distributeur d'air occupe sa premiĆØre position , dite sortie, sont positionnĆ©es toutes deux cĆ“te Ć  cĆ“te et situĆ©es toutes deux du mĆŖme cotĆ© de l'harmonica par rapport au plan longitudinal PX de symĆ©trie gĆ©nĆ©rale tandis que les deux autres lames sonores alimentĆ©es par le mĆŖme trou d'embouchure lorsque le distributeur occupe sa seconde position , dite rentrĆ©e, sont positionnĆ©es toutes deux cĆ“te Ć  cĆ“te et situĆ©es toutes deux de l'autre cotĆ© du plan PX . Ceci revient Ć  dire que dans la disposition antĆ©rieure chacun des deux canaux pouvant ĆŖtre alimentĆ©s sĆ©lectivement par le distributeur d'air et contenant chacun une lame aspirĆ©e et une lame soufflĆ©e sont disposĆ©s symĆ©triquement l'un par rapport Ć  l'autre par rapport au plan Px susmentionnĆ© et qu'en consĆ©quence ces deux canaux sont sĆ©parĆ©s l'un de l'autre par une paroi s'Ć©tendant dans le sens longitudinal de l'harmonica , le plan mĆ©dian de ladite paroi Ć©tant parallĆØle et gĆ©nĆ©ralement mĆŖme coplanaire avec le plan Px . chacun des canaux est donc fermĆ© sur trois de ses 4 cotĆ©s puisque des parois latĆ©rales disposĆ©es, elles, perpendiculairement au plan Px assurent la sĆ©paration entre une paire de canaux alimentĆ©s par un mĆŖme trou d'embouchure et la paire de canaux voisins alimentĆ©es par le trou d'embouchure suivant. Cette conception antĆ©rieure consistant Ć  juxtaposer deux canaux dans le sens de l'Ć©paisseur de l'instrument entraĆ®ne une addition des cotes de dĆ©battement des extrĆ©mitĆ©s des lames sonores Ć  laquelle s'ajoute de surcroĆ®t l'Ć©paisseur de la paroi de sĆ©paration mĆ©diane et ce cumul des cotes se traduit par une Ć©paisseur consĆ©quente de l'instrument qui se rĆ©vĆØle pĆ©nalisante pour la prise en main . Finally, it is necessary to underline the very particular interest that the arrangement of the channels as described in the various embodiments presented in this document have with respect to the configuration of the harmonicas of the prior art for this type of harmonica with which the harmonicist can access a double register of notes generally shifted relative to each other by a semitone hence the term chromatic harmonica generally used to designate this type of instrument. In fact, in the chromatic harmonicas of the prior art, the two sound blades, one of sucked type and the other of blown type, supplied when the air distributor occupies its first position, said outlet, are both positioned. side by side and both located on the same side of the harmonica with respect to the longitudinal plane PX of general symmetry while the other two sound blades fed by the same mouth hole when the distributor occupies its second position, said return, are positioned side by side and both located on the other side of the PX plane. This amounts to saying that in the prior arrangement each of the two channels that can be selectively supplied by the air distributor and each containing a suction blade and a blown blade are arranged symmetrically relative to each other with respect to the plane Px mentioned above and that consequently these two channels are separated from each other by a wall extending in the longitudinal direction of the harmonica, the median plane of said wall being parallel and generally even coplanar with the plane Px. each of the channels is closed on three of its four sides since side walls arranged perpendicularly to the plane Px ensure the separation between a pair of channels fed by the same mouth hole and the pair of neighboring channels fed by the hole mouthpiece next. This earlier concept consisting in juxtaposing two channels in the direction of the thickness of the instrument results in an addition of the travel dimensions of the ends of the sound waves to which is added in addition the thickness of the medial partition wall and this accumulation dimensions results in a substantial thickness of the instrument which is penalizing for the grip.
A contrario , dans l'harmonica 1 selon l'invention les deux lames , l'une aspirĆ©e et l'autre soufflĆ©e , contenues dans un canal 30 alimentĆ© lorsque le distributeur d'air 6 occupe sa premiĆØre position sont disposĆ©es en vis-Ć -vis l'une de l'autre de part et d'autre du plan Px de symĆ©trie gĆ©nĆ©rale de l'instrument, de la mĆŖme maniĆØre que les deux autres lames l'une aspirĆ©e et l'autre soufflĆ©e , contenues dans le canal contigu 31 alimentĆ© lorsque le distributeur d'air 6 occupe sa seconde position, sont elles aussi disposĆ©es en vis-Ć -vis l'une de l'autre . Les canaux de circulation d'air ne sont donc fermĆ©s les uns et les autres que sur leurs deux faces latĆ©rales par des parois de sĆ©paration disposĆ©es parallĆØlement entre elles et positionnĆ©es perpendiculairement au plan Px de symĆ©trie gĆ©nĆ©rale de l'instrument . l'absence de parois de sĆ©paration disposĆ©e dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument permet ainsi de rapprocher beaucoup les porte-lames comparativement Ć  la disposition antĆ©rieure et ce compte tenu du fait que les lames aspirĆ©es et soufflĆ©es sont disposĆ©s tĆŖte bĆŖche ce qui permet d'Ć©viter une collision entre leur extrĆ©mitĆ© libre respectives lorsque celles-ci oscillent et il s'en suit une amincissement notable et trĆØs apprĆ©ciable de l'Ć©paisseur du peigne de l'instrument et donc une rĆ©duction importante de l'Ć©paisseur gĆ©nĆ©rale de l'harmonica ce qui rend la prise en main facile y compris en tenant un micro dans le creux de la main . II est Ć©galement important de noter que si toutes les figures prĆ©sentĆ©es montrent une peigne dont les deux plans passant par les faces d'appui des porte-lames sont soit parallĆØles entre elles soit forment un diĆØdre ouvert en direction de l'embouchure de l'instrument, on ne sortirait pas du cadre de l'invention si l'harmonica prĆ©sentait les caractĆ©ristiques de cette invention en les associant Ć  un peigne dont les faces d'appui des porte-lames seraient disposĆ©es de telle maniĆØre que les plans qui les contiennent constituent un diĆØdre ouvert en direction du pavillon de l'instrument . Conversely, in the harmonica 1 according to the invention the two blades, one sucked and the other blown, contained in a channel 30 fed when the air distributor 6 occupies its first position are arranged vis-Ć - screw one of the other on both sides of the plane Px of general symmetry of the instrument, in the same way as the other two blades one sucked and the other blown, contained in the contiguous channel 31 fed when the air distributor 6 occupies its second position, are also arranged vis-Ć -vis one another. The air circulation channels are thus closed both on their two lateral faces by partition walls arranged parallel to each other and positioned perpendicularly to the plane Px of general symmetry of the instrument. the absence of partition walls disposed in the longitudinal direction of the instrument thus allows the blade holders to be brought much closer compared to the previous arrangement, and this in view of the fact that the blades that are sucked and blown are arranged head to tail, which makes it possible to avoid a collision between their respective free ends when they oscillate and it follows a significant and very appreciable thinning of the thickness of the comb of the instrument and therefore a significant reduction in the overall thickness of the harmonica which makes handling easy even by holding a microphone in the palm of your hand. It is also important to note that if all the figures shown show a comb whose two planes passing through the bearing faces of the blade holders are either parallel to each other or form a dihedral open towards the mouth of the instrument it would not be outside the scope of the invention if the harmonica had the characteristics of this invention by associating them with a comb whose support faces of the blade carriers would be arranged in such a way that the planes containing them constitute a dihedral open towards the flag of the instrument.
Les figures 38 Ć  50 prĆ©sentent un autre mode de rĆ©alisation d'un harmonica selon l'invention dont toutes les lames sonores aspirĆ©es 211 et toutes les lames sonres soufflĆ©es 212 sont supportĆ©es par le mĆŖme porte-lames 21 . FIGS. 38 to 50 show another embodiment of a harmonica according to the invention, in which all the extracted sound blades 211 and all the blown sounding blades 212 are supported by the same blade holder 21.
Lesdites lames aspirĆ©es 211 et soufflĆ©es 212 sont disposĆ©es tĆŖte - bĆŖche en ligne de part et d'autre du porte-lames 21 auquel elles sont solidarisĆ©es par paires par une vis commune traversant le dĆ©flecteur interne 27 , le talon de la lame soufflĆ©e 212 , le porte-lames 21 , le talon de la lame aspirĆ©e 211 puis le dĆ©flecteur externe 26 pour aller se visser dans un Ć©crou noyĆ© dans le dĆ©flecteur externe 26. Ā Said aspirated blades 211 and blowers 212 are arranged head to tail in a row on either side of the blade holder 21 to which they are secured in pairs by a common screw passing through the internal deflector 27, the heel of the blown blade 212, the blade holder 21, the heel of the sucked blade 211 and the outer baffle 26 to be screwed into a nut embedded in the outer baffle 26.
Les axes longitudinaux respectifs de la lame aspirĆ©e 211 et de la lame soufflĆ©e 212 sont disposĆ©s parallĆØlement , et voire mĆŖme coplanairement, avec l'axe longitudinal du canal d'air unique 220 qui les dessert et les parties libres oscillantes desdites lames sonores s'Ć©tirent dans deux directions diamĆ©tralement opposĆ©es l'une par rapport Ć  l'autre. Ā The respective longitudinal axes of the sucked blade 211 and the blown blade 212 are arranged parallel, and even coplanarly, with the longitudinal axis of the single air channel 220 which serves them and the free oscillating parts of said sound blades stretch. in two diametrically opposite directions with respect to each other.
Le porte-lames unique 21 est disposĆ© obliquement par rapport au plan longitudinal moyen Px qui coupe ledit porte-lames 21 dans une zone comprise entre les deux extrĆ©mitĆ©s libres opposĆ©es de la lame aspirĆ©e 211 la plus grave et de la lame soufflĆ©e 212 la plus grave alimentĆ©es toutes deux par un canal 220 commun . Il faut noter que le porte-lames unique 21 disposĆ© ici obliquement par rapport au plan Px pourrait tout aussi bien ĆŖtre disposĆ© parallĆØlement au plan Px sans que l'on ne sorte pour autant du cadre de l'invention . Les canaux de circulation d'air 220 amĆ©nagĆ©s dans le peigne 22 ne traversent pas la totalitĆ© de l'Ć©paisseur dudit peigne de telle sorte qu'ils sont fermĆ©s par une paroi s'Ć©tendant dans le sens longitudinal de l'harmonica , ladite paroi longitudinale du peigne constituant ainsi l'une des deux faces longitudinales extĆ©rieures de la coque pĆ©riphĆ©rique de l'instrument . Du fait de la disposition oblique du porte-lames par rapport au plan longitudinal moyen Px de l'instrument les canaux d'air sont avantageusement de forme sensiblement conique et donc de section globalement dĆ©gressive lorsqu'on s'Ć©loigne de l'embouchure de l'instrument pour se rapprocher du pavillon . Cette configuration se traduit par une inclinaison de l'axe longitudinal moyen des canaux de circulation d'air par rapport au plan Px selon une valeur angulaire Ļ† telle que le plan moyen global de la face de l'embouchure de l'instrument n'est pas disposĆ©e perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal moyen Px selon le mode classique de l'art antĆ©rieur mais inclinĆ© d'une valeur angulaire avantageusement sensiblement Ć©gale Ć  Ļ† par rapport audit plan perpendiculaire au plan Px et la valeur de l'angle Ļ† est avantageusement comprise entre dix degrĆ©s et 30 degrĆ©s . The single blade holder 21 is arranged obliquely with respect to the mean longitudinal plane Px which cuts said blade holder 21 in an area between the two opposite free ends of the sucked blade 211 and the worst blown blade 212 the most serious fed both by a common channel 220. It should be noted that the single blade holder 21 disposed here obliquely with respect to the plane Px could equally well be arranged parallel to the plane Px without thereby departing from the scope of the invention. The air circulation channels 220 arranged in the comb 22 do not pass through the entire thickness of said comb so that they are closed by a wall extending in the longitudinal direction of the harmonica, said longitudinal wall comb thus constituting one of the two outer longitudinal faces of the peripheral shell of the instrument. Due to the oblique arrangement of the blade holder relative to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument, the air channels are advantageously of substantially conical shape and therefore of generally degressive section when moving away from the mouth of the nozzle. instrument to get closer to the pavilion. This configuration results in an inclination of the average longitudinal axis of the air circulation channels with respect to the plane Px according to an angular value Ļ† such that the overall mean plane of the face of the mouth of the instrument is not arranged perpendicular to the average longitudinal plane Px according to the conventional mode of the prior art but inclined by an angular value advantageously substantially equal to Ļ† relative to said plane perpendicular to the plane Px and the value of the angle Ļ† is advantageously between ten degrees and 30 degrees.
Il faut noter que la disposition du porte-lames et du peigne peut ĆŖtre inversĆ©e par rapport Ć  la disposition reprĆ©sentĆ©e sur les figures 38 Ć  50 dans laquelle, lorsque l'harmonica occupe sa position de jeu le plan Px Ć©tant alors disposĆ© sensiblement horizontalement, le porte- lames unique 21 est disposĆ© au dessus du peigne 22 dans lequel sont amĆ©nagĆ©s les canaux 22 . Dans la disposition inversĆ©e, non reprĆ©sentĆ©e sur ces dessins , lorsque l'harmonica occupe sa position de jeu le plan Px Ć©tant alors disposĆ© sensiblement horizontalement, le porte-lames unique 21 est alors disposĆ© au dessous du peigne 22 dans lequel sont amĆ©nagĆ©s les canaux 22 . Comme le montrent les figures 38 Ć  50 , le porte-lames 21 n'est pas solidarisĆ© au peigne par des vis qui doivent ĆŖtre dĆ©montĆ©es pour le dĆ©solidariser du peigne comme c'est le cas pour les harmonicas de l'art antĆ©rieur mais est pris en sandwich entre ledit peigne 22 et le capot 23 jouant le rĆ“le de presseur excerƧant un appui d'une part au moins au niveau du bord longitudinal du porte-lame s'Ć©tendant du cotĆ© de l'embouchure 24 ainsi qu'au niveau du bord longitudinal dudit porte-lames s'Ć©tendant le long du pavillon et d'autre part au niveau de plusieurs membrures d'appui 230 solidaires du capot 23 disposĆ©es sensiblement perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal moyen Px . Chacune des membrures d'appui constitue une nervure de renfort du capot 23 et se prĆ©sente sous la forme d'une paroi dont le plan mĆ©dian est disposĆ© avantageusement de faƧon coplanaire avec le plan mĆ©dian de la paroi 221 correspondante sĆ©parant entre eux deux canaux contigus 220 du peigne 22 . Les moyens de pression tendant Ć  rapprocher le capot 23 du peigne 22 sont ici constituĆ©s de vis 37 traversant ledit capot, ainsi que le cas Ć©chĆ©ant une membrure correspondante 230, puis le porte-lames 21 pour aller se visser dans le peigne 22 . Bien-sĆ»r les vis peuvent ĆŖtre disposĆ©es dans la position inverse , leurs tĆŖtes seĀ»situant alors du cotĆ© du peigne 22 et leurs tiges venant se visser dans le capot 23 . Chacune de ces vis peut aussi ĆŖtre remplacĆ©e par un couple constituĆ© d'une vis femelle associĆ©e Ć  une vis mĆ¢le dont les tĆŖtes respectives dĆ©bouchent Ć  l'extĆ©rieur du capot 23 et du peigne 22 . It should be noted that the arrangement of the blade holder and the comb can be reversed with respect to the arrangement shown in FIGS. 38 to 50 in which, when the harmonica occupies its play position, the plane Px being then disposed substantially horizontally, the The single blade holder 21 is disposed above the comb 22 in which the channels 22 are arranged. In the inverted arrangement, not shown in these drawings, when the harmonica occupies its play position, the plane Px then being arranged substantially horizontally, the single blade holder 21 is then disposed below the comb 22 in which the channels 22 are arranged. . As shown in FIGS. 38 to 50, the blade holder 21 is not secured to the comb by screws which must be disassembled in order to separate it from the comb as is the case for the harmonicas of the prior art but is taken sandwiched between said comb 22 and the cover 23 acting as a presser exerting a support on the one hand at least at the longitudinal edge of the blade holder extending on the side of the mouth 24 and at the edge longitudinal of said blade holder extending along the roof and secondly at a plurality of support members 230 integral with the cover 23 arranged substantially perpendicular to the mean longitudinal plane Px. Each of the support members constitutes a reinforcing rib of the cover 23 and is in the form of a wall whose median plane is advantageously arranged coplanar with the median plane of the corresponding wall 221 separating between them two contiguous channels 220 comb 22. The pressure means tending to bring the cover 23 closer to the comb 22 consist here of screws 37 passing through said cover, as well as, where appropriate, a corresponding frame 230, then the blade holder 21 to be screwed into the comb 22. Of course the screws can be arranged in the opposite position, their heads then being located on the side of the comb 22 and their rods coming to screw into the cover 23. Each of these screws may also be replaced by a pair consisting of a female screw associated with a male screw whose respective heads open out of the cover 23 and the comb 22.
L'harmonica selon l'invention comporte au moins une vis de pression 37 implantĆ©e dans la partie de l'instrument comprise entre les deux plans disposĆ©s perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal moyen Px de l'instrument et passant l'un par l'axe longitudinal du canal de circulation d'air alimentant la lame la plus grave de l'instrument et l'autre par l'axe longitudinal du canal alimentant la lame sonore la plus aiguĆ« de l'instrument . Ā The harmonica according to the invention comprises at least one pressure screw 37 implanted in the part of the instrument between the two planes arranged perpendicularly to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument and passing through the longitudinal axis of the instrument. air circulation channel feeding the most serious blade of the instrument and the other by the longitudinal axis of the channel feeding the highest pitch of the instrument.
Selon une autre caractƩristique , l'axe longitudinal d'au moins l'une des vis de serrage des capots-presseurs est positionnƩe Ơ une distance de la face d'embouchure infƩrieure Ơ la distance sƩparant ladite face d'embouchure du fond du canal de circulation d'air 220 alimentant la lame la plus grave de l'instrument . According to another characteristic, the longitudinal axis of at least one of the clamping screws of the pressure caps is positioned at a distance from the mouth face lower than the distance separating said mouth face from the bottom of the channel of air circulation 220 feeding the worst blade of the instrument.
Selon une autre caractĆ©ristique , pour augmenter au maximum la force de placage du porte- lames 21 contre le peigne 22 exercĆ©e par le capot-presseur 23 du cotĆ© de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument les moyens de pression constituĆ©s de vis de pression 37 sont implantĆ©s le plus prĆØs possible de ladite face d'embouchure et pour que la tige desdites vis ne vienne pas empiĆ©ter Ć  l'intĆ©rieur d'un canal de circulation d'air 220 , certains au moins desdits canaux d'air 220 sont orientĆ©s de faƧon lĆ©gĆØrement oblique par rapport Ć  la face d'embouchure de l'instrument de maniĆØre Ć  ce que , tout en respectant strictement sans l'augmenter l'entraxe Ex des trous d'embouchure entre eux , certaines au moins des parois de sĆ©paration latĆ©rale 221 des canaux entre eux aillent en s'Ć©largissant lorsqu'on s'Ć©loigne de la face d'embouchure pour ce. rapprocher du pavillon de l'instrument en offrant ainsi rapidement une largeur suffisante pour que la vis de pression 37 concernĆ©e puisse ĆŖtre implantĆ©e entre deux lames sonores contiguĆ«s et voire mĆŖme entre la base fixe et l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre desdites lames sonores contiguĆ«s . According to another feature, to maximize the plating force of the blade carrier 21 against the comb 22 exerted by the pressure cap 23 on the side of the mouth face of the instrument pressure means consisting of pressure screws 37 are located as close as possible to said mouth face and that the rod of said screws does not come to encroach inside an air circulation channel 220, at least some of said air channels 220 are oriented in a slightly oblique manner with respect to the mouth face of the instrument so that, while respecting strictly without increasing the spacing Ex between mouth holes, at least some of the lateral separation walls 221 channels between them go widening when one moves away from the mouth face for this. bring closer to the flag of the instrument thus quickly offering a width sufficient for the pressure screw 37 concerned can be implanted between two contiguous sound waves and even between the fixed base and the free end of said adjoining sound blades.
Comme le montre la figure 38 pour permettre l'implantation des vis de pression 37 le plus prĆØs possible de la face d'embouchure tel que ci-avant dĆ©crit , les canaux de circulation d'air 220 que comporte ledit peigne 22 sont rĆ©partis en cinq groupes . Chacun desdits groupes est ici constituĆ© de quatre canaux contigus correspondant Ć  deux trous d'embouchure contigus. A l'intĆ©rieur de chacun de ces cinq groupes les axes longitudinaux desdits canaux 220 sont avantageusement parallĆØles entre eux tandis que lesdits axes longitudinaux 220 de l'un desdits groupes de canaux sont divergents par rapport aux axes longitudinaux des canaux d'un autre groupe de canaux voisins de telle sorte que la paroi de sĆ©paration sĆ©parant les deux canaux d'air contigiie appartenant Ć  deux groupes voisins aille en s'Ć©largissant lorsqu'on s'Ć©loigne de la face d'embouchure pour se rapprocher de la face du pavillon de l'instrument . As shown in Figure 38 to allow the implantation of the pressure screws 37 as close as possible to the mouth face as described above, the air flow channels 220 that includes said comb 22 are divided into five groups. Each of said groups here consists of four contiguous channels corresponding to two contiguous mouth holes. Within each of these five groups, the longitudinal axes of said channels 220 are advantageously parallel to each other while said longitudinal axes 220 of one of said groups of channels are divergent with respect to the longitudinal axes of the channels of another group of channels. adjacent channels so that the partition wall separating the two contiguous air channels belonging to two neighboring groups widens as one moves away from the mouth face to approach the face of the roof of the roof. instrument.
Tel qu'illustrĆ© sur la figure 38 seul les axes longitudinaux des quatre canaux 220 correspondant aux trous d'embouchure 5 et 6 et constituant le groupe central sont disposĆ©s perpendiculairement Ć  la face d'embouchure de l'instrument tandis que les axes longitudinaux des canaux des autres groupes de canaux sont orientĆ©s obliquement symĆ©triquement les uns par rapport aux autres par rapport au plan perpendiculaire Ć  Px passant par le millieu de l'espace sĆ©parant les deux trous d'embouchure 5 et 6 . Ā As illustrated in FIG. 38 only the longitudinal axes of the four channels 220 corresponding to the mouth holes 5 and 6 and constituting the central group are arranged perpendicularly to the mouth face of the instrument while the longitudinal axes of the channels other groups of channels are oriented obliquely symmetrically with respect to each other with respect to the plane perpendicular to Px passing through the middle of the space separating the two mouth holes 5 and 6.
Comme le montre la figure 38 pour certaines au moins des vis de pression 37 la droite passant par l'axe longitudinal desdites vis traverse une paroi 221 sƩparant entre eux deux canaux de circulation d'air adjacents 220 dont les axes longitudinaux respectifs sont divergents lorsque l'on s'Ʃloigne de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument pour se rapprocher du pavillon de l'instrument et l'axe longitudinal desdites vis de serrage du capot - presseur 23 est positionnƩ Ơ une distance de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument infƩrieure Ơ la distance de ladite face d'embouchure Ơ laquelle se situe le fond du plus court des deux canaux d'air 220 jouxtant la paroi dans laquelle est implantƩe la vis de serrage concernƩe. As shown in FIG. 38 for at least some of the pressure screws 37, the straight line passing through the longitudinal axis of said screws passes through a wall 221 separating between them two adjacent air circulation channels 220 whose respective longitudinal axes are divergent when the one moves away from the mouth face of the instrument to get closer to the flag of the instrument and the longitudinal axis of said clamping screws of the presser cover 23 is positioned at a distance from the mouth face of the mouthpiece. the instrument below the distance from said mouth face at which is the bottom of the shorter of the two air channels 220 adjacent the wall in which is implanted the clamping screw concerned.
La figure 39 montre un agrandissement de la zone correspondante de la figure 38 illustrant le dĆ©tail de rĆ©alisation du dispositif de rĆ©glage de la prĆ©contrainte des moyens assurant le rappel automatique en position sortie du distributeur d'air 25 lorsque le joueur n'appuie pas sur l'extrĆ©mitĆ© dudit distributeur constituant son bouton de commande . Ces moyens de rappel sont ici constituĆ©s d'un ressort hĆ©licoĆÆdal de compression 252 associĆ© Ć  un dispositif permettant d'adapter la prĆ©contrainte aux souhaits du joueur constituĆ© d'une douille 250, taraudĆ©e intĆ©rieurement, sertie Ć  l'intĆ©rieur dudit bouton et dans laquelle un goujon filetĆ© 251 peut se dĆ©placer axialement par simple vissage ou dĆ©vissage actionnable directement de l'extĆ©rieur , sans nĆ©cessiter le dĆ©montage de l'instrument , Ć  l'aide d'un outil idoine d'entraĆ®nement introduit par un trou amĆ©nagĆ© au travers du bouton de commande du distributeur d'air 25 . Comme le montrent les figures 38, 42, 45 et 47 certaines au moins des lames sonores aspirĆ©es 211 sont associĆ©es Ć  un dĆ©flecteur 26 recouvrant une partie de la longueur de la fenĆŖtre du porte-lames 21 au travers de laquelle oscille la lame sonore concernĆ©e . le dĆ©flecteur susmentionnĆ© se prolonge par une fine lamelle-valve souple 260 s'Ć©tendant dans le sens opposĆ© Ć  l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame sonore dont il constitue le dĆ©flecteur et cette lamelle souple constitue la valve d'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© de la lame sonore soufflĆ©e 212 alimentĆ©e par le mĆŖme canal d'air 220. FIG. 39 shows an enlargement of the corresponding zone of FIG. 38 illustrating the embodiment detail of the device for adjusting the prestressing of the means ensuring the automatic return to the extended position of the air distributor 25 when the player does not press on the end of said distributor constituting its control button. These return means here consist of a helical compression spring 252 associated with a device for adapting the prestressing to the wishes of the player consisting of a bush 250, internally threaded, crimped inside said button and in which a threaded stud 251 can move axially by simply screwing or unscrewing, which can be operated directly from the outside, without the need to dismantle the instrument, using a suitable drive tool introduced through a hole made through the button control of the air distributor 25. As shown in FIGS. 38, 42, 45 and 47, at least some of the aspirated sound blades 211 are associated with a deflector 26 covering a portion of the length of the window of the blade holder 21 through which the sound blade concerned oscillates. the aforementioned deflector is extended by a thin flexible valve blade 260 extending in the opposite direction to the free end of the sound blade which it is the deflector and this flexible blade is the sealing valve of the blown sound blade 212 powered by the same air channel 220.
La longueur et la largeur de la lamelle souple susmentionnĆ©e 260 sont supĆ©rieures aux dimensions de la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille la lame sonore soufflĆ©e 212 comme le montrent d'une part les traits discontinus correspondants portĆ©s sur les lamelles- valves correspondant aux canaux 220 alimentĆ©s par les trous d'embouchure 3 et 4 ainsi que les arrachements localisĆ©s effectuĆ©s sur les lamelle-valves 260 des canaux d'air correspondant au trou d'embouchure 5 . The length and the width of the above-mentioned soft blade 260 are greater than the dimensions of the window through which the blown sound wave oscillates 212, as shown, on the one hand, by the corresponding discontinuous lines on the valve lamellae corresponding to the powered channels 220. by the mouth-holes 3 and 4 as well as the localized tear-offs effected on the leaf-valves 260 of the air channels corresponding to the mouth-hole 5.
Lorsque le joueur aspire dans le canal concernĆ© les admissions intempestives d'air au travers de la fenĆŖtre de la lame sonore soufflĆ©e 212 viennent plaquer la lamelle-valve souple 260 contre la face du porte-lames 21 en obturant ainsi complĆØtement la fenĆŖtre de passage d'air de ladite lame sonore soufflĆ©e 212 et en obligeant de ce fait Ć  la totalitĆ© du flux d'air aspirĆ© de passer au travers de la fenĆŖtre de la lame aspirĆ©e 211 dont le type correspond bien, lui, au sens du flux aspirĆ©. A contrario, lorsque le joueur souffle dans le canal concernĆ© les fuites intempestives d'air au travers de la fenĆŖtre de la lame sonore aspirĆ©e 211 viennent plaquer la lamelle-valve souple 270 contre la face du porte-lames 21 en obturant ainsi complĆØtement la fenĆŖtre de passage d'air de ladite lame sonore aspirĆ©e 21 1 et en obligeant de ce fait Ć  la totalitĆ© du flux d'air soufflĆ© de passer au travers de la fenĆŖtre de la lame soufflĆ©e 212 dont le type correspond bien, lui, au sens du flux soufflĆ© . When the player sucks in the channel concerned inadvertent admissions of air through the window of the blown sound blade 212 come to press the flexible valve blade 260 against the face of the blade holder 21 thus completely closing the window of passage of air of said blown sound blade 212 and thereby forcing the entire intake of air flow to pass through the window of the aspirated blade 211, the type corresponds well, him, in the sense of the flow sucked. On the other hand, when the player blows into the channel in question, the unwanted air leaks through the window of the aspirated sound blade 211 come to press the flexible valve blade 270 against the face of the blade holder 21, thus closing the window completely. of air passage of said extracted sound blade 21 1 and thus forcing the entire flow of air blown to pass through the window of the blown blade 212, the type corresponds well, him, in the sense of flow blown.
Les dĆ©flecteurs 26 , 27 et la lamelle fine correspondante 260, 270 constituant la valve peuvent ĆŖtre avantageusement rĆ©alisĆ©s, par moulage notamment, en mĆŖme temps et dans le mĆŖme matiĆØre pour constituer alors un ensemble monolithique mono composant aussi bien qu'ĆŖtre rĆ©alisĆ©s en injection bi-matiĆØre Ć  partir de deux matiĆØres diffĆ©rentes mais nĆ©anmoins compatibles entre elles . The deflectors 26, 27 and the corresponding thin strip 260, 270 constituting the valve may advantageously be produced, in particular by molding, at the same time and in the same material, to then constitute a single-component monolithic assembly as well as being made by dual injection molding. -material from two different materials but nevertheless compatible with each other.
Les dĆ©flecteurs 26 et 27 comportent avantageusement un petit ergot anti-rotation , respectivement 261 et 271 , en saillie par rapport Ć  leur face d'appui contre le porte-lame 21 , ledit ergot venant se loger dans l'Ć©paisseur du porte-lames dans la fenĆŖtre dans laquelle oscille la lame opposĆ©e Ć  celle pour laquelle chacun desdits dĆ©flecteur joue son rĆ“le de dĆ©flecteur. The deflectors 26 and 27 advantageously comprise a small anti-rotation pin, respectively 261 and 271, protruding with respect to their bearing face against the blade holder 21, said pin being received in the thickness of the blade holder in the window in which oscillates the blade opposite to that for which each of said deflector plays its role of deflector.
La figure 44 montre quant Ć  elle que le montage, contre la face correspondante du porte- lames, des lames graves comportant une surĆ©paisseur 100 au niveau de leur extrĆ©mitĆ© libre constituant une masselotte de lestage Ć  Ć©tĆ© inversĆ© par rapport au montage de l'art antĆ©rieur reprĆ©sentĆ© sur la figure 43 dans lequel lesdites lames graves sont montĆ©es de telle faƧon que ladite surĆ©paisseur des lames 100 et le redan que celle-ci constitue sont situĆ©s sur la face de la lame opposĆ©e Ć  celle qui est plaquĆ©e contre le porte-lames ce qui entraĆ®ne une perturbation des Ć©coulement laminaires des flux d'air animant lesdites lames . Le montage inversĆ© proposĆ© est illustrĆ© sur la figure 44 dans lequel la face de la lame comportant la surĆ©paisseur 100 est orientĆ©e contre le porte-lames et le dos de la lame est donc parfaitement lisse ce qui permet aux filets d'air de s'Ć©couler sans perturbation en glissant sur la zone d'extrĆ©mitĆ© de la partie libre des lames sans rencontrer d'obstacles qui crĆ©eraient des tourbillons prompts Ć  entraĆ®ner des phĆ©nomĆØnes de torsion et donc de vrillage de la lame ce qui est trĆØs pĆ©nalisant pour sa durĆ©e de vie et par ailleurs peu harmonieux sur le plan musical. FIG. 44 shows that the assembly, against the corresponding face of the blade holder, of the bass blades having an excess thickness 100 at their free end constituting a ballast weight has been inverted compared to the assembly of the prior art. shown in Figure 43 wherein said low blades are mounted such that said extra thickness of the blades 100 and the redan that it constitutes are located on the face of the blade opposite to that which is pressed against the blade holder which causes a disruption of the laminar flow of air flows animating said blades. The proposed reverse arrangement is illustrated in FIG. 44 in which the face of the blade comprising the excess thickness 100 is oriented against the blade holder and the back of the blade is therefore perfectly smooth, which allows the air streams to flow. without disturbance by sliding on the end zone of the free portion of the blades without encountering obstacles that would create swirls prompt to cause twisting and therefore twisting of the blade which is very detrimental to its life and otherwise not very harmonious on the musical level.
Comme le montrent par ailleurs les figures 44 , 44 Bis et 44 Ter aussi bien pour faciliter l'amorƧage des oscillations de la lame sonore sous un faible filet d'air que pour compenser, au niveau de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame, la rĆ©duction d'ouverture d'Ć©chappement de l'air dĆ»e Ć  la prĆ©sence de la masselotte sur l'autre face de la lame suite au montage inversĆ© ci-avant dĆ©crit , des creusures 101 , en forme de chanfreins ou de congĆ©s, peuvent ĆŖtre avantageusement rĆ©alisĆ©es dans le porte-lames . Ces creusures 101 peuvent ĆŖtre rĆ©alisĆ©es Ć  la fois au niveau de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© de la fenĆŖtre concernĆ©e ainsi que sur une partie au moins de ses bords longitudinaux et ce dans la face du porte-lames contre laquelle est plaquĆ©e la lame sonore concernĆ©e . Ā As shown also in Figures 44, 44 Bis and 44 Ter as well to facilitate the initiation of oscillations of the sound blade under a small air stream to compensate, at the free end of the blade, the reduction of exhaust opening of the air due to the presence of the flyweight on the other side of the blade following the inverted assembly described above, recesses 101, shaped chamfers or leave, can be advantageously made in the blade holder. These recesses 101 may be made both at the end of the window concerned and on at least part of its longitudinal edges and in the face of the blade holder against which is plated the sound blade concerned.
La figure 46 est une vue agrandie de la zone correspondante de la figure 45 montrant un mode de rƩalisation d'un distributeur d'air 25 dont certaines au moins des faces comportent des chicanes d'ƩtanchƩitƩ 253 destinƩes Ơ s'opposer aux fuites d'air intempestives entre ledit distributeur 25 et/ou le peigne 22 et/ou l'ƩlƩment d'embouchure 24 et/ou le capot 23 . Ces chicanes 253 amƩnagƩes dans les faces du distributeur d'air 25 s'Ʃtendent dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument et elles sont constituƩes de redans , et/ou de nervures et/ou de rainures de dimensions et de formes complƩmentaires parfaitement ajustƩes Ơ des redans et/ou Ơ des nervures et/ou Ơ des rainures complƩmentaires amƩnagƩs dans les faces correspondantes de l'ƩlƩment d'embouchure 24 et/ou du peigne 22 et/ou des capots 23 contre lesquelles coulisse ledit distributeur . Les figures 48 Ơ 50 illustrent une variante de rƩalisation de l'harmonica comportant un seul porte-lames reprƩsentƩ sur les figures prƩcƩdentes . FIG. 46 is an enlarged view of the corresponding zone of FIG. 45 showing an embodiment of an air distributor 25, at least some of whose faces comprise sealing baffles 253 intended to oppose leaks of unwanted air between said distributor 25 and / or the comb 22 and / or the mouth member 24 and / or the hood 23. These baffles 253 formed in the faces of the air distributor 25 extend in the longitudinal direction of the instrument and they consist of steps, and / or ribs and / or grooves of dimensions and complementary shapes perfectly adjusted to steps and / or ribs and / or complementary grooves formed in the corresponding faces of the mouth member 24 and / or the comb 22 and / or covers 23 against which slides said distributor. Figures 48 to 50 illustrate an alternative embodiment of the harmonica having a single blade holder shown in the previous figures.
Certaines au moins des fenĆŖtres au travers desquelles oscillent les lames sonores aspirĆ©es 38 et soufflĆ©es 39 sont en partie recouvertes par des dĆ©flecteurs particuliers en forme de spoilers 35 et 36 disposĆ©s tĆŖte-bĆŖche de part et d'autre du porte-lames , lesdits dĆ©flecteurs constituant chacun un bossage avantageusement de forme convexe dans le sens longitudinal et dans le sens transversal destinĆ© Ć  constituer un spoiler ou dĆ©flecteur aux formes aĆ©rodynamiques permettant aux filets d'air de passer, avec le moins de perturbation possible, par-dessus la zone dans laquelle sont positionnĆ©s Ć  la fois le rivet ou la vis de fixation des lames et la tranche verticale de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© de chacune des fenĆŖtres situĆ©e du cotĆ© de la partie fixe de la lame sonore concernĆ©e . En effet dans les montages de l'art antĆ©rieurs la proĆ©minente des rivets de fixation des lames au porte-lames aussi bien que le fond rectangulaire vertical et donc trĆØs peu aĆ©rodynamique constituĆ© par la tranche des fenĆŖtres reprĆ©sentent autant d'obstacles s'opposant Ć  un Ć©coulement fluides et continus des filets d'air . At least some of the windows through which oscillate the audible blades 38 and blown 39 are partially covered by special baffles spoilers 35 and 36 arranged head to tail on both sides of the blade holder, said baffles constituting each a boss advantageously of convex shape in the longitudinal direction and in the transverse direction for constituting a spoiler or deflector aerodynamic forms allowing the air streams to pass, with the least possible disturbance, over the area in which are positioned both the rivet or the blade fixing screw and the vertical portion of the end of each of the windows located on the side of the fixed part of the sound blade concerned. Indeed, in prior art montages the protruding rivets fastening the blades to the blade holder as well as the vertical rectangular bottom and thus very little aerodynamic constituted by the edge of the windows represent as many obstacles opposing a fluid and continuous flow of air streams.
Chacun de ces dĆ©flecteurs particuliers , respectivement 35 et 36 , est constituĆ© d'une paroi de forme curviligne convexe au moins dans le sens axial longitudinal des lames sonores concernĆ©es , ladite paroi se positionnant au delĆ  de l'espace balayĆ© par les lames lors de leurs oscillations maximales, et il recouvre en continu Ć  la fois une partie de la lame sonore plaquĆ©e contre la mĆŖme face du porte-lames que lui .respectivement 38 et 39, et donc Ć©galement la partie correspondante de la fenĆŖtre qui est associĆ©e Ć  ladite lame, et une partie de la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille la lame sonore fixĆ©e sur la face opposĆ©e du porte-lames, respectivement 39 et 38 . Ā Each of these particular deflectors, respectively 35 and 36, consists of a curvilinear wall convex at least in the longitudinal axial direction of the sound blades concerned, said wall being positioned beyond the space swept by the blades during their maximum oscillations, and it covers continuously both part of the sound blade pressed against the same face of the blade holder as it respects 38 and 39, and therefore also the corresponding portion of the window which is associated with said blade, and a part of the window through which oscillates the sound blade fixed on the opposite face of the blade holder, respectively 39 and 38.
Selon un premier mode de rĆ©alisation chacun des deux dĆ©flecteurs - spoilers s'Ć©tend en continu dans le sens longitudinal des deux lames sonores sur une longueur hors tout telle que, Ć  partir des deux extrĆ©mitĆ©s opposĆ©es des fenĆŖtres concernĆ©es, les deux extrĆ©mitĆ©s opposĆ©es de chacun desdits dĆ©flecteurs-spoilers se situent Ć  des distances , respectivement da1 et ds1 pour le dĆ©flecteur extĆ©rieur 35 et da2 et ds2 pour le dĆ©flecteur intĆ©rieur 36 , infĆ©rieures au trois quart de la longueur, respectivement Da et Ds, des fenĆŖtres au travers desquelles oscillent les lames sonores concernĆ©es 38 et 39 . According to a first embodiment, each of the two spoilers extends continuously in the longitudinal direction of the two sound waves over an overall length such that, from the two opposite ends of the windows concerned, the two opposite ends of each of said deflectors-spoilers are at distances, respectively da1 and ds1 for the outer deflector 35 and da2 and ds2 for the inner deflector 36, less than three quarters of the length, respectively Da and Ds, of the windows through which the sound waves sway concerned 38 and 39.
Selon un mode prĆ©fĆ©rentiel de rĆ©alisation les dĆ©flecteurs s'Ć©tendent sur une longueur totale hors tout telle que chacune des distances da1 et ds1 pour le dĆ©flecteur extĆ©rieur 35 et da2 et ds2 pour le dĆ©flecteur intĆ©rieur 36 sont infĆ©rieures au deux tiers de la longueur, respectivement Da et Ds, des fenĆŖtres au travers desquelles oscillent les lames sonores concernĆ©es 38 et 39 . Les spoilers internes 36 sont positionnĆ©s Ć  l'intĆ©rieur des canaux d'air et ils peuvent ĆŖtre rapportĆ©s et fixĆ©s au porte-lames par tout moyen comme par exemple une vis tel que reprĆ©sentĆ© sur les figures 48 Ć  50 mais ces spoiler internes peuvent aussi avantageusement constituer un ensemble monolithique avec le peigne en Ć©tant alors indĆ©pendant du porte- lames . According to a preferred embodiment, the deflectors extend over an overall overall length such that each of the distances da1 and ds1 for the outer deflector 35 and da2 and ds2 for the inner baffle 36 are less than two-thirds of the length, respectively Da and Ds, of the windows through which the sound waves concerned 38 and 39 oscillate. The internal spoilers 36 are positioned inside the air channels and they can be attached and fixed to the blade holder by any means such as for example a screw as shown in Figures 48 to 50, but these internal spoilers can also advantageously constitute a monolithic assembly with the comb while being independent of the blade carrier.
Les spoilers externes sont disposĆ©s entre la face extĆ©riure du porte-lames et la face intĆ©rieure correspondante du capot 23 et ils peuvent eux aussi ĆŖtre rapportĆ©s et ĆŖtre fixĆ©s au porte-lames par tout moyen comme par exemple une vis tel que reprĆ©sentĆ© sur les figures 48 Ć  50 mais ils peuvent aussi avantageusement ĆŖtre rĆ©unis entre eux pour constituer un Ć©lĆ©ment profilĆ© selon le profil transversal convexe requis , ledit Ć©lĆ©ment s'Ć©tendant sensiblement dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument en Ć©tant le cas Ć©chĆ©ant reliĆ© au membrures du capot 23 . The outer spoilers are arranged between the outer face of the blade holder and the corresponding inner face of the cover 23 and they can also be reported and be fixed to the blade holder by any means such as for example a screw as shown in FIGS. to 50 but they can also advantageously be joined together to form a profiled element according to the required convex transverse profile, said element extending substantially in the longitudinal direction of the instrument being optionally connected to the frame of the cover 23.
Comme le montrent les figures 48 Ć  50 les dĆ©flecteurs-spoilers sont ici fixĆ©s ensemble par une vis commune qui assure Ć©galement la fixation de la lame aspirĆ©e 38 et de la lame souflĆ©e 39 contre les faces correspondantes du porte-lames pris en sandwich antre lesdites lames . Chacun des deux spoilers 35 et 36 comporte un ergot anti-rotation venant s'insĆ©rer avec prĆ©cision dans la fenĆŖtre de la lame aspirĆ©e pour le spoiler intĆ©rieur 36 et dans la fenĆŖtre de la lame soufflĆ©e pour le spoiler extĆ©rieur 35 Les figures 48 Ć  50 montrent que certaines au moins des lames sonores de l'instrument sont associĆ©es Ć  au moins un si ce n'est deux ailerons , respectivement 33 et 34 , disposĆ©s de part et d'autre du porte-lames unique 21 . Ces deux ailerons sont de section transversale fuselĆ©e asymĆ©trique et leurs axes longitudinaux respectifs s'Ć©tendent dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument sensiblement parallĆØlement au plan Px . As shown in Figures 48 to 50 baffles spoilers are here fixed together by a common screw which also ensures the attachment of the sucked blade 38 and the blown blade 39 against the corresponding faces of the blade holder sandwiched between said blades . Each of the two spoilers 35 and 36 has an anti-rotation pin which fits precisely in the window of the blade sucked for the inner spoiler 36 and in the window of the blown blade for the outer spoiler 35 Figures 48 to 50 show that at least some of the sound waves of the instrument are associated with at least one if not two fins, respectively 33 and 34, arranged on either side of the single blade holder 21. These two fins are asymmetric tapered cross section and their respective longitudinal axes extend in the longitudinal direction of the instrument substantially parallel to the plane Px.
Le premier aileron 33 est disposĆ© Ć  l'intĆ©rieur du canal concernĆ© qu'il traverse de part en part dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument et son bord d'attaque situĆ© le plus proche de l'embouchure est positionnĆ© sensiblement en face de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame aspirĆ©e 38 tandis que le second aileron 34 est implantĆ© de l'autre cotĆ© du porte-lames unique, donc entre la face extĆ©rieure du porte-lames et la face intĆ©rieure du capot . Ce second aileron 34 est implantĆ© de telle maniĆØre que son bord d'attaque situĆ© le plus proche du pavillon de l'instrument est positionnĆ© sensiblement en face de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame soufflĆ©e 39 . Chacun de ces deux ailerons comporte une face lĆ©gĆØrement convexe que nous dĆ©nommerons intrados et une seconde face dont la convexitĆ© est beaucoup plus accentuĆ©e que nous dĆ©nommerons extrados, ledit extrados Ć©tant orientĆ©e en direction du porte-lames aussi bien pour l'aileron interne 33 que pour l'aileron externe 34 . The first fin 33 is disposed inside the relevant channel through which it passes right through the longitudinal direction of the instrument and its leading edge located closest to the mouth is positioned substantially opposite the free end of the suction blade 38 while the second fin 34 is implanted on the other side of the single blade holder, so between the outer face of the blade holder and the inner face of the cover. This second fin 34 is implanted such that its leading edge located closest to the flag of the instrument is positioned substantially opposite the free end of the blown blade 39. Each of these two fins has a slightly convex face which we will call intrados and a second face whose convexity is much more accentuated than we will call extrados, said extrados being oriented in the direction of the blade holder both for the inner fin 33 and for the outer fin 34.
La figure 49 montre le fonctionnement de ces amĆ©nagements lorsque le joueur souffle dans le canal de circulation d'air associĆ© Ć  la lame aspirĆ©e 38 et Ć  la lame soufflĆ©e 39 . L'aileron 33 divise le flux d'air soufflĆ© initial en deux flux : un flux principal et un flux secondaire. Le flux principal passe entre l'intrados de l'aileron 90 et la paroi du peigne constituant le capot et fermant les canaux sur leur troisiĆØme cĆ“tĆ© , Ce flux principal d'air suit un parcours quasiment rectiligne pour rejoindre par le plus court chemin la partie libre de la lame sonore soufflĆ©e 39 . FIG. 49 shows the operation of these arrangements when the player blows in the air circulation channel associated with the sucked blade 38 and the blown blade 39. The fin 33 divides the flow of initial blown air into two streams: a main stream and a secondary stream. The main flow passes between the underside of the fin 90 and the wall of the comb constituting the hood and closing the channels on their third side, This main air flow follows an almost straight path to reach by the shortest path the part free of blown sound blade 39.
Dans le mĆŖme temps le second flux , considĆ©rĆ© comme le flux secondaire, contourne l'extrados de l'aileron interne 33 en passant entre ledit extrados et la face intĆ©rieure correspondante du porte-lames puis entre l'extrados et la face convexe du dĆ©flecteur-spoiler interne 36 . Du fait de la convexitĆ© plus marquĆ©e et par voie de consĆ©quence de la longueur supĆ©rieure de l'extrados par rapport Ć  celle de l'intrados, ce flux secondaire suit donc un parcours plus long que celui que suit le flux principal ce qui impose une augmentation de vitesse dans la zone de l'extrados aux filets d'air du flux secondaire entraĆ®nĆ©s dans leur course par les filets d'air du flux principal . Ā At the same time, the second flow, considered as the secondary flow, bypasses the upper surface of the inner fin 33, passing between said extrados and the corresponding inner face of the blade carrier and between the extrados and the convex face of the deflector. internal spoiler 36. Due to the greater convexity and consequently the greater length of the extrados compared to that of the intrados, this secondary flow therefore follows a longer path than that which follows the main flow which imposes an increase velocity in the area of the extrados to the air streams of the secondary flow entrained in their race by the air streams of the main flow.
Par effet Venturi, cet Ć©coulement rapide des filets d'air du flux secondaire provoque une lĆ©gĆØre dĆ©pression dans la zone de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame aspirĆ©e 38 qui se traduit par une aspiration s'exerƧant sur la partie libre de la lame aspirĆ©e 38 tendant Ć  rapprocher du porte-lames, selon F1 , la partie libre de la lame aspirĆ©e 38 qui vient ainsi refermer la fenĆŖtre correspondante amĆ©nagĆ©e dans ledit porte-lames . La dĆ©pression crĆ©Ć©e par l'effet Venturi Ć©tant faible celle-ci ne permet qu'une lĆ©gĆØre flexion de la lame aspirĆ©e juste suffisante pour que celle-ci vienne se placer dans l'Ć©paisseur du porte-lames en refermant bĆ©nĆ©fiquement ladite fenĆŖtre Ć  la maniĆØre d'une valve mais cette dĆ©pression n'est pas suffisamment forte pour pouvoir entraĆ®ner en oscillation parasite ladite lame aspirĆ©e 38 ce qui est parfait . Ā By Venturi effect, this rapid flow of the air streams of the secondary flow causes a slight depression in the area of the free end of the aspirated blade 38 which results in a suction acting on the free portion of the aspirated blade 38 tending to bring closer to the blade holder, along F1, the free portion of the suction blade 38 which thus closes the corresponding window formed in said blade holder. The depression created by the Venturi effect being low it allows only a slight bending of the suction blade just sufficient for it to be placed in the thickness of the blade holder by closing the window beneficially in the manner of a valve but this depression is not strong enough to cause parasitic oscillation said aspirated blade 38 which is perfect.
Le flux secondaire glisse ensuite sur la paroi convexe du spoiler 36 en enjambant ainsi la zone de fixation de la lame soufflĆ©e , pour aller rejoindre le flux principal et tous deux s'Ć©chappent ensuite en direction du pavillon de l'instrument en entraĆ®nant en oscillation la lame soufflĆ©e 39 lors de leur passage au travers de la fenĆŖtre correspondante La figure 50 montre, elle, le principe de fonctionnement de ces amĆ©nagements lorsque le joueur aspire dans le canal de circulation d'air associĆ© Ć  la lame aspirĆ©e 38 et Ć  la lame soufflĆ©e 39. Le flux d'air aspirĆ© entre majoritairement dans l'harmonica directement par l'ouverture 230 amĆ©nagĆ©e au travers du capot et positionnĆ©e en vis-Ć -vis de la zone de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame aspirĆ©e 38 , un flux complĆ©mentaire arrive cependant du pavillon de l'instrument . Tout au long du pavillon s'Ć©tend un bourellet 28 de section curviligne triangulaire servant de tremplin aĆ©rodynamique pour les filets d'air aspirĆ© par le pavillon qui sont ainsi majoritairement dirigĆ©s entre l'intrados de l'aileron externe 34 et la face intĆ©rieure correspondante du capot 23 et qui suivent ensuite un parcours quasiment rectiligne pour rejoindre par le plus court chemin la partie libre de la lame sonore aspirĆ©e 38. The secondary flow then slides on the convex wall of the spoiler 36, thus spanning the attachment zone of the blown blade, to join the main flow and both then escape towards the instrument horn, causing the oscillator to oscillate. Blown blade 39 during their passage through the corresponding window FIG. 50 shows the principle of operation of these arrangements when the player sucks in the air circulation channel associated with the aspirated blade 38 and the blown blade 39. The flow of air sucked between mostly in the harmonica directly by the opening 230 arranged through the cover and positioned vis-Ć -vis the area of the free end of the suction blade 38, a complementary flow however arrives from the flag of the instrument. Throughout the flag extends a burette 28 of triangular curvilinear section serving as an aerodynamic springboard for the air streams sucked by the flag which are thus mainly directed between the underside of the outer fin 34 and the corresponding inner face of the cover 23 and then follow a path almost rectilinear to reach by the shortest path the free part of the aspired sound blade 38.
Une minoritƩ de filets d'air aspirƩs passe cependant entre l'extrados de l'aileron externe 34 et la face extƩrieure correspondante du porte-lames puis entre ledit extrados et la face convexe du dƩflecteur-spoiler externe 35 . LƠ encore, du fait de la convexitƩ plus marquƩe et par voie de consƩquence de la longueur supƩrieure de l'extrados par rapport Ơ celle de l'intrados, ce flux minoritaire suit donc un parcours plus long que celui que suit le flux principal en provenance du pavillon ce qui impose une augmentation de vitesse dans la zone de l'extrados aux filets d'air du flux secondaire entraƮnƩs dans leur course par les filets d'air dudit flux principal en provenace du pavillon de l'instrument. A minority of sucked air threads, however, passes between the extrados of the outer fin 34 and the corresponding outer face of the blade holder and between said extrados and the convex face of the outer spoiler-deflector 35. Again, because of the greater convexity and consequently the greater length of the extrados compared to that of the intrados, this minority flow follows a longer path than that which follows the main flow from of the flag which imposes an increase of speed in the area of the extrados to the air streams of the secondary flow entrained in their race by the air streams of said main stream coming from the flag of the instrument.
Par effet Venturi, cet Ć©coulement rapide des filets d'air du flux minoritaire provoque une lĆ©gĆØre dĆ©pression dans la zone de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame soufflĆ©e 39 qui se traduit par une aspiration s'exerƧant sur la partie libre de la lame soufflĆ©e 39 tendant Ć  rapprocher du porte-lames, selon F2, la partie libre de ladite lame soufflĆ©e 39 qui vient ainsi refermer la fenĆŖtre correspondante amĆ©nagĆ©e dans ledit porte-lames . LĆ  encore, la dĆ©pression crĆ©Ć©e par l'effet Venturi Ć©tant faible celle-ci ne permet qu'une lĆ©gĆØre flexion de la lame aspirĆ©e juste suffisante pour que celle-ci vienne se placer dans l'Ć©paisseur du porte-lames en refermant bĆ©nĆ©fiquement ladite fenĆŖtre Ć  la maniĆØre d'une valve mais cette dĆ©pression n'est pas suffisamment forte pour pouvoir entraĆ®ner en oscillation intempestives ladite lame soufflĆ©e 39 ce qui est parfait . Ā By Venturi effect, this rapid flow of the air streams of the minority flow causes a slight depression in the area of the free end of the blown blade 39 which results in a suction exerted on the free portion of the blown blade 39 tending to bring closer to the blade holder, according to F2, the free portion of said blown blade 39 which thus closes the corresponding window formed in said blade holder. Again, the depression created by the Venturi effect is low it allows only a slight bending of the aspirated blade just sufficient for it to be placed in the thickness of the blade holder by closing the window beneficially in the manner of a valve but this depression is not strong enough to be able to cause unwanted oscillation said blade blown 39 which is perfect.
Le flux minoritaire glisse ensuite sur la paroi convexe du spoiler externe 35 en enjambant ainsi la zone de fixation de la lame aspirĆ©e pour aller rejoindre les deux autres flux et tous trois se dirigent ensuite vers l'embouchure de l'instrument en entraĆ®nant en oscillation la lame aspirĆ©e 38 lors de leur passage au travers de la fenĆŖtre correspondante Ā The minority flow then slides on the convex wall of the outer spoiler 35 and spanning the attachment zone of the suction blade to join the other two flows and all three then move towards the mouth of the instrument by causing oscillation the blade sucked 38 during their passage through the corresponding window
L'invention n'est pas limitƩe aux seuls modes de rƩalisation montrƩs ou dƩcrits dans ce document mais elle comprend Ʃgalement tous les Ʃquivalents techniques ainsi que leurs combinaisons . The invention is not limited to the embodiments shown or described herein, but it also includes all technical equivalents as well as combinations thereof.

Claims

I Revendications Ā I Claims
1 - Harmonica (1) comportant : 1 - Harmonica (1) comprising:
un Ć©lĆ©ment d'embouchure (2) dans la face extĆ©rieure duquel dĆ©bouchent les trous d'embouchures (200) par lesquels l'harmoniciste aspire ou insuffle de l'air qui met en oscillation les lames sonores de l'instrument , chacun des trous d'embouchure (200) desservant deux canaux de circulation d'air (30,31 ,220) alimentant chacun au moins une lame sonore soufflĆ©e (500,212,39) et au moins une lame sonore aspirĆ©e (400,211 ,38) , un peigne (7,22) ou sommier dans l'Ć©paisseur duquel sont rĆ©alisĆ©s une pluralitĆ© de canaux de circulation d'air (30,31) ledit peigne supportant au moins un porte-lames (4,5,21) sur lequel sont montĆ©es des lames sonores (400,500,21 1 ,212,38,39) mises en oscillations par les flux d'air gĆ©nĆ©rĆ©s par le joueur , Ā a mouthpiece (2) in the outer face of which open the mouth holes (200) by which the harmonicist sucks or breathes air that oscillates the sound waves of the instrument, each of the holes mouth (200) serving two air circulation channels (30,31, 220) each feeding at least one blown sound blade (500,212,39) and at least one aspirated sound blade (400,211, 38), a comb (7 , 22) or bed base in the thickness of which are formed a plurality of air circulation channels (30,31) said comb supporting at least one blade holder (4,5,21) on which are mounted sound slides ( 400,500,21 1, 212,38,39) oscillated by the air flows generated by the player,
- un distributeur d'air (6,25) , interposƩ entre l'ƩlƩment d'embouchure (2) et le peigne (7,22) ledit distributeur d'air (6,25) Ʃtant destinƩ Ơ diriger sƩlectivement l'air soufflƩ ou aspirƩ par le joueur vers l'un (30,220) ou l'autre (31 ,220) des deux canaux de circulation d'air alimentƩs par un trou d'embouchure (200) commun auxdits deux canaux d'air (30,31 ,220), une coque pƩriphƩrique (17) ou deux capots (10,23) permettant la tenue en main de l'harmonica et assurant l'amplification des sons et leur projection en direction du pavillon de l'instrument , ledit harmonica (1) Ʃtant caractƩrisƩ en ce que : - chaque trou d'embouchure (200) alimente deux canaux de circulation d'air (30,31 ,220) alimentant chacun au moins une lame soufflƩe (500,212,39) et au moins une lame aspirƩe (400,211 ,38) , an air distributor (6,25), interposed between the mouthpiece element (2) and the comb (7,22), said air distributor (6,25) being intended to selectively direct the blown air or sucked by the player to one (30,220) or the other (31,220) of the two air circulation channels fed by a mouth hole (200) common to said two air channels (30,31). , 220), a peripheral shell (17) or two covers (10, 23) for holding the harmonica in hand and ensuring the amplification of the sounds and their projection towards the horn of the instrument, said harmonica (1 ) being characterized in that: each orifice hole (200) feeds two air circulation channels (30, 31, 220) each supplying at least one blown blade (500, 212, 29) and at least one aspirated blade (400, 211, 38),
- les axes longitudinaux des deux lames (400,500,21 1 ,212,38,39) desservies par un mĆŖme canal de circulation d'air (30,31 ,220) sont coplanaires avec l'axe longitudinal dudit canal d'airĀ the longitudinal axes of the two blades (400,500,21 1, 212,38,39) served by the same air circulation channel (30,31,220) are coplanar with the longitudinal axis of said air channel
(30,31 ,220), (30,31, 220),
- pour chacun des trous d'embouchure (200) , les deux canaux de circulation d'air (30,31 ,220) alimentĆ©s par ledit trou d'embouchure commun (200) sont disposĆ©s cĆ“te Ć  cĆ“te en Ć©tant sĆ©parĆ©s l'un de l'autre par une paroi de sĆ©paration disposĆ©e transversalement par rapport Ć  l'axe longitudinal de l'instrument et sensiblement perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal moyen Px passant sensiblement Ć  mi-Ć©paisseur de l'instrument et passant donc sensiblement par le milieu des trous d'embouchure (200) et passant au voisinage du milieu du pavillon de l'instrument, Ā for each of the mouth holes (200), the two air circulation channels (30, 31, 220) supplied by said common mouth hole (200) are arranged side by side and separated from one another by the other by a separating wall arranged transversely to the longitudinal axis of the instrument and substantially perpendicular to the average longitudinal plane Px passing substantially mid-thickness of the instrument and thus passing substantially through the middle of the holes of mouth (200) and passing near the middle of the flag of the instrument,
- pour chacun des deux canaux de circulation d'air (30,31 ,220) alimentĆ©s par un trou d'embouchure commun (200), le distributeur d'air (6,25) se dĆ©place par translation axiale dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument pour passer de sa premiĆØre position, dans laquelle il occulte l'entrĆ©e du second canal de circulation d'air (31 ,220) et il dirige les flux d'air vers le premier canal (30,220) alimentant au moins une premiĆØre lame soufflĆ©e et au moins une premiĆØre lame aspirĆ©e Ć  sa seconde position dans laquelle il occulte l'entrĆ©e du premier canal de circulation d'air (30,220) et il dirige les flux d'air vers le second canal (31 ,220) alimentant au moins une seconde lame soufflĆ©e et une seconde lame aspirĆ©e , Ā for each of the two air circulation channels (30, 31, 220) fed by a common mouth hole (200), the air distributor (6, 25) moves by axial translation in the longitudinal direction of the instrument to move from its first position, in which it obscures the entrance of the second air circulation channel (31, 220) and directs the air flows to the first channel (30, 220) feeding at least a first blown blade and at least one first blade sucked to its second position in which it conceals the inlet of the first air flow channel (30,220) and directs the air flows to the second channel (31, 220) feeding at minus a second blown blade and a second aspirated blade,
- le distributeur d'air (6,25) est en forme gĆ©nĆ©rale d'Ć©chelle constituĆ©e de deux Ć©lĆ©ments longitudinaux disposĆ©s sensiblement parallĆØlement Ć  l'axe longitudinal de l'instrument reliĆ©s entre eux par des Ć©lĆ©ments transversaux (60) , Ā the air distributor (6, 25) is in the general shape of a scale consisting of two longitudinal elements arranged substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis of the instrument interconnected by transverse elements (60),
- les ƩlƩments transversaux (60) susmentionnƩs sont de forme globalement profilƩe et leur largeur, mesurƩe dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument , est globalement dƩgressive au fur et Ơ mesure que l'on s'Ʃloigne de leur face situƩe la plus proche du pavillon de l'instrument pour se rapprocher de leur face situƩe la plus proche de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument. the above-mentioned transverse elements (60) are of generally profiled shape and their width, measured in the longitudinal direction of the instrument, is generally degressive as one moves away from their face nearest the flag of the instrument to get closer to their face located closest to the mouth of the instrument.
2 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication 1 caractƩrisƩ en ce que certaines au moins des faces du distributeur d'air coulissant (25) comportent des chicanes d'ƩtanchƩitƩ (253) qui s'Ʃtendent dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument et qui sont constituƩes de redans , et/ou de nervures et/ou de rainures de dimensions et de formes complƩmentaires parfaitement ajustƩes Ơ des redans et/ou Ơ des nervures et/ou Ơ des rainures complƩmentaires amƩnagƩs dans les faces correspondantes de l'ƩlƩment d'embouchure(24) et/ou du peigne (22) et/ou des capots (23) contre lesquelles coulisse ledit distributeur . 3 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication 1 caractƩrisƩ en ce que : 2 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 1 characterized in that at least some of the faces of the sliding air distributor (25) comprise sealing baffles (253) which extend in the longitudinal direction of the instrument and which consist of steps, and / or ribs and / or grooves of complementary dimensions and shapes perfectly fitted to steps and / or ribs and / or complementary grooves formed in the corresponding faces of the element d mouth (24) and / or comb (22) and / or covers (23) against which slides said distributor. 3 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 1 characterized in that:
- pour certaines au moins des lames sonores qu'il comporte, la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille la lame concernĆ©e est en partie recouverte par un dĆ©flecteurĀ for at least some of the sound waves that it comprises, the window through which the blade oscillates is partially covered by a deflector
(15,16,26,27,800,700) positionnƩe au-delƠ de la zone balayƩe par la partie oscillante de la lame sonore concernƩe , (15,16,26,27,800,700) positioned beyond the area swept by the oscillating portion of the sound blade concerned,
- l'extrĆ©mitĆ© du dĆ©flecteur (15,16,26,27,800,700) situĆ©e du cotĆ© de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame sonore concernĆ©e est situĆ©e Ć  une distance (Da ,Ds ) de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© de la fenĆŖtre situĆ©e du cotĆ© de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de ladite lame, comprise entre le quart et les trois quarts de la longueur totale ( La ,Ls ) de la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille ladite lame,Ā - the end of the deflector (15,16,26,27,800,700) located on the side of the free end of the sound blade concerned is located at a distance (Da, Ds) from the end of the window located on the side of the free end of said blade, between one quarter and three quarters of the total length (La, Ls) of the window through which said blade oscillates,
- les dƩflecteurs (15,26,800) associƩs aux lames aspirƩes sont positionnƩs entre le porte- lames (4,21 ) et la face intƩrieure du capot (10,17,23) correspondant , - the baffles (15,26,800) associated with the suction blades are positioned between the blade carrier (4,21) and the corresponding inner face of the cover (10,17,23),
- les dĆ©flecteurs (16,27,700) associĆ©s aux lames soufflĆ©es sont positionnĆ©s Ć  l'intĆ©rieur des canaux d'air amĆ©nagĆ©s dans le sommier(7,22) de l'harmonica. Ā - The baffles (16,27,700) associated with the blown blades are positioned inside the air channels arranged in the bed base (7,22) of the harmonica.
4 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication 1 caractƩrisƩ en ce que : 4 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 1 characterized in that:
- il comporte un seul porte-lames (21) supportant toutes les lames aspirĆ©es (21 1) et toutes les lames soufflĆ©es (212), Ā it comprises a single blade holder (21) supporting all the aspirated blades (21 1) and all the blown blades (212),
- les lames aspirĆ©es (211 ) et soufflĆ©es (212) sont rĆ©unies par paires en Ć©tant disposĆ©es en ligne et tĆŖte-bĆŖche de part et d'autre du porte-lames concernĆ© leurs axes longitudinaux respectifs Ć©tant parallĆØle Ć  l'axe longitudinal du canal d'air unique (220) qui les dessert et les parties libres oscillantes desdites lames sonores s'Ć©tirent dans deux directions diamĆ©tralement opposĆ©es l'une par rapport Ć  l'autre , Ā the sucked (211) and blown (212) knives are united in pairs while being arranged in line and head to tail on either side of the blade holder concerned, their respective longitudinal axes being parallel to the longitudinal axis of the d-channel; single air (220) which serves them and the oscillating free portions of said sound blades extend in two diametrically opposite directions with respect to each other,
- les canaux de circulation d'air (220) amĆ©nagĆ©s dans le peigne (22) ne traversent pas la totalitĆ© de l'Ć©paisseur du peigne de telle sorte qu'ils sont fermĆ©s par une paroi s'Ć©tendant dans le sens longitudinal de l'harmonica , ladite paroi longitudinale du peigne constituant ainsi l'une des deux faces longitudinales extĆ©rieures de la coque pĆ©riphĆ©rique de l'instrument . Ā the air circulation ducts (220) arranged in the comb (22) do not pass through the entire thickness of the comb so that they are closed by a wall extending in the longitudinal direction of the comb; harmonica, said longitudinal wall of the comb thus constituting one of the two outer longitudinal faces of the peripheral shell of the instrument.
5 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication 4, caractƩrisƩ en ce que : 5 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 4, characterized in that:
- certaines au moins des paires de lames sonores sont associĆ©es Ć  un dĆ©flecteur (26,27) recouvrant une partie de la longueur de la fenĆŖtre du porte-lames au travers de laquelle oscille la premiĆØre lame sonore du canal concernĆ© qui est soit du type lame aspirĆ©e(21 1 ) soit du type lame soufflĆ©e (212) , - ledit dĆ©flecteur (26,27) est prolongĆ© par une fine lamelle souple (260,270) s'Ć©tendant dans le sens opposĆ© Ć  l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame sonore dont il constitue le dĆ©flecteur et cette lamelle souple constitue la valve d'Ć©tanchĆ©itĆ© de la seconde lame sonore alimentĆ©e par le canal d'air concernĆ© (220) at least some of the pairs of sound blades are associated with a deflector (26,27) covering a part of the length of the window of the blade holder through which oscillates the first sound blade of the concerned channel which is either of the blade type sucked (21 1) is of the blown blade type (212), said deflector (26, 27) is extended by a thin flexible strip (260, 270) extending in the opposite direction to the free end of the sound blade of which it constitutes the deflector, and this flexible strip constitutes the sealing valve of the second sound blade fed by the air channel concerned (220)
- la longueur et la largeur de la lamelle souple sont lĆ©gĆØrement supĆ©rieures aux dimensions de la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille cette seconde lame sonore qui est de type opposĆ© Ć  la premiĆØre lame , donc respectivement soit une lame soufflĆ©e (212) soit une lame aspirĆ©e (211) the length and the width of the flexible blade are slightly greater than the dimensions of the window through which this second sound blade oscillates which is of the opposite type to the first blade, and therefore respectively is a blown blade (212) or an aspirated blade (211)
- lorsque le flux d'air est de sens contraire Ć  celui qui correspond au type de la seconde lame sonore , il vient plaquer la lamelle souple contre la face du porte-lames en obturant ainsi complĆØtement la fenĆŖtre de passage d'air de cette seconde lame sonore et en obligeant de ce fait Ć  la totalitĆ© du flux d'air de passer au travers de la fenĆŖtre de la premiĆØre lame dont le type aspirĆ© ou soufflĆ© correspond bien, lui, au sens du flux en cours , 6 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication 4 caractĆ©risĆ© en ce que : Ā - When the air flow is opposite to that which corresponds to the type of the second sound blade, it comes to press the flexible blade against the face of the blade holder and completely closing the air passage window of this second sound blade and thus forcing the entire airflow to pass through the window of the first blade whose type sucked or blown corresponds well, it, in the sense of current flow, 6 - Harmonica (1 ) according to claim 4 characterized in that:
- certaines au moins des fenĆŖtres au travers desquelles oscillent les lames sonores aspirĆ©es (38) ou soufflĆ©es (39) sont en partie recouvertes par des dĆ©flecteurs-spoilers (35,36) disposĆ©s tĆŖte-bĆŖche de part et d'autre du porte-lames, Ā at least some of the windows through which the aspirated (38) or blown sound waves (39) oscillate are partly covered by spoiler baffles (35,36) arranged head-to-tail on either side of the blade holder ,
-les dĆ©flecteurs-spoilers internes (36) sont positionnĆ©s Ć  l'intĆ©rieur des canaux d'air tandis que les dĆ©flecteurs-spoilers externes(35) sont disposĆ©s entre la face extĆ©rieure du porte- lames et la face intĆ©rieure correspondante du capot (23) Ā the internal spoiler-baffles (36) are positioned inside the air channels while the outer spoiler-baffles (35) are arranged between the outer face of the blade carrier and the corresponding inner face of the cover (23)
- chacun de ces dĆ©flecteurs-spoilers (35,36) est constituĆ© d'une paroi de forme curviligne convexe au moins dans le sens axial longitudinal des lames sonores concernĆ©es , ladite paroi se positionnant au delĆ  de l'espace balayĆ© par les lames lors de leurs oscillations maximales, et il recouvre en continu Ć  la fois une partie de la lame sonore plaquĆ©e contre la mĆŖme face du porte-lames que lui .respectivement (38 ,39), et donc Ć©galement la partie correspondante de la fenĆŖtre qui est associĆ©e Ć  ladite lame, et une partie de la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille la lame sonore fixĆ©e sur la face opposĆ©e du porte-lames, respectivement (39,38), Ā each of these deflectors-spoilers (35,36) consists of a wall of convex curvilinear shape at least in the longitudinal axial direction of the sound strips concerned, said wall being positioned beyond the space swept by the blades when their maximum oscillations, and it covers continuously both a part of the sound blade pressed against the same face of the blade holder as it respects (38, 39), and therefore also the corresponding part of the window which is associated with said blade, and a part of the window through which oscillates the sound blade fixed on the opposite face of the blade holder, respectively (39,38),
- chacun des deux dĆ©flecteurs - spoilers (35,36) s'Ć©tend en continu dans le sens longitudinal des deux lames sonores sur une longueur hors tout telle que, Ć  partir des deux extrĆ©mitĆ©s opposĆ©es des fenĆŖtres concernĆ©es, les deux extrĆ©mitĆ©s opposĆ©es de chacun desdits dĆ©flecteurs-spoilers se situent Ć  des distances , respectivement da1 et ds1 pour le dĆ©flecteur extĆ©rieur (35) et da2 et ds2 pour le dĆ©flecteur intĆ©rieur (36) , infĆ©rieures au trois quart de la longueur, respectivement Da et Ds, des fenĆŖtres au travers desquelles oscillent les lames sonores concernĆ©es (38, 39) . 7 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication 1 caractĆ©risĆ© en ce que : - each of the two baffles - spoilers (35,36) extends continuously in the longitudinal direction of the two sound waves over an overall length such that, from the two opposite ends of the windows concerned, the two opposite ends of each of the said deflectors-spoilers are at distances, respectively da1 and ds1 for the outer deflector (35) and da2 and ds2 for the inner deflector (36), less than three quarters of the length, respectively Da and Ds, of the windows through which oscillate the sound waves concerned (38, 39). 7 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 1 characterized in that:
- il comporte deux porte-lames dont l'un (4) supporte toutes les lames sonores aspirĆ©es(400) tandis que l'autre (5) supporte toutes les lames soufflĆ©es(500), Ā it comprises two blade holders, one of which (4) supports all the extracted sound blades (400) while the other (5) supports all the blown blades (500),
- le peigne (7) ainsi que les porte-lames (4,5) qu'il supporte sont dĆ©centrĆ©s dans le sens latĆ©ral par rapport au plan longitudinal moyen (Px) passant par la mi-Ć©paisseur de l'instrument au niveau de l'embouchure et par la r i-Ć©paisseur de l'instrument au niveau du pavillon , Ā the comb (7) and the blade holders (4,5) which it supports are off-center in the lateral direction relative to the mean longitudinal plane (Px) passing through the mid-thickness of the instrument at the level of the mouth and by the thickness of the instrument at the pavilion level,
- la face du peigne (7) contre laquelle s'appuie le porte-lames (4) supportant les lames aspirĆ©es (400) est positionnĆ©e plus prĆØs dudit plan longitudinal moyen (Px) que ne l'est la face du peigne (7) contre laquelle s'appuie le porte-lames (5) supportant les lames soufflĆ©es (500) . Ā the face of the comb (7) against which the blade holder (4) supporting the aspirated blades (400) rests is positioned closer to said mean longitudinal plane (Px) than is the face of the comb (7) against which rests the blade holder (5) supporting the blown blades (500).
8 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication 1 , caractƩrisƩ en ce que : 8 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 1, characterized in that:
- il comporte au moins un porte-lames (21) pris en sandwich entre un capot - presseur (23) et la face correspondante du peigne (22) sous l'action de moyens de pression tendant Ć  rapprocher ledit capot-presseur de ladite face du peigne , Ā - It comprises at least one blade holder (21) sandwiched between a pressure cap (23) and the corresponding face of the comb (22) under the action of pressure means tending to bring said pressure cap closer to said face comb,
- les moyens de pression susmentionnĆ©s sont constituĆ©s par au moins une vis de pression(37) implantĆ©e dans la partie de l'instrument comprise entre les deux plans disposĆ©s perpendiculairement au plan longitudinal moyen Px de l'instrument et passant l'un par l'axe longitudinal du canal de circulation d'air alimentant la lame la plus grave de l'instrument et l'autre par l'axe longitudinal du canal alimentant la lame sonore la plus aiguĆ« de l'instrument . Ā the aforementioned pressure means consist of at least one pressure screw (37) implanted in the part of the instrument between the two planes arranged perpendicularly to the mean longitudinal plane Px of the instrument and passing through the longitudinal axis of the air circulation channel feeding the most serious blade of the instrument and the other by the longitudinal axis of the channel feeding the highest pitch of the instrument.
- l'axe longitudinal d'au moins l'une des vis de serrage (37) du capot-presseur (23) est positionnĆ©e Ć  une distance de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument infĆ©rieure Ć  la distance sĆ©parant ladite face d'embouchure du fond du canal de circulation d'air (220) alimentant la lame la plus grave de l'instrument . Ā the longitudinal axis of at least one of the clamping screws (37) of the pressure cap (23) is positioned at a distance from the mouth face of the lower instrument to the distance separating said face from mouth of the bottom of the airflow channel (220) feeding the worst blade of the instrument.
9 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication prƩcƩdente 8, caractƩrisƩ en ce que : 9 - Harmonica (1) according to the preceding claim 8, characterized in that:
- la droite contenant l'axe longitudinal d'au moins une vis de pression (37) tendant Ć  rapprocher le capot-presseur (23) concernĆ© de la face correspondante du peigne (22) traverse une paroi (221) sĆ©parant entre eux deux canaux de circulation d'air adjacents (220) dont les axes longitudinaux respectifs sont divergents lorsque l'on s'Ć©loigne de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument pour se rapprocher du pavillon de l'instrument, Ā - The straight line containing the longitudinal axis of at least one pressure screw (37) tending to bring the bonnet (23) concerned of the corresponding face of the comb (22) through a wall (221) separating them two channels of adjacent air circulation (220) whose respective longitudinal axes are divergent when one moves away from the mouth face of the instrument to approach the flag of the instrument,
- l'axe longitudinal de ladite vis de serrage (37) est positionnƩ Ơ une distance de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument infƩrieure Ơ la distance de ladite face d'embouchure Ơ laquelle se situe le fond du plus court des deux canaux d'air (220) jouxtant la paroi dans laquelle est implantƩe ladite vis de serrage (37). 10 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication prƩcƩdente 1 , caractƩrisƩ en ce que : - The longitudinal axis of said clamping screw (37) is positioned at a distance from the mouth of the mouth of the lower instrument to the distance from said mouth face which is the bottom of the shorter of the two channels air (220) adjoining the wall in which is implanted said clamping screw (37). Harmonica (1) according to the preceding claim 1, characterized in that:
- certaines au moins des lames sonores de l'instrument sont associĆ©es Ć  deux ailerons, respectivement (33) et (34) , disposĆ©s de part et d'autre du porte-lames unique (21) , - ces deux ailerons sont de section transversale fuselĆ©e asymĆ©trique et leurs axes longitudinaux respectifs s'Ć©tendent dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument sensiblement parallĆØlement au plan Px , Ā at least some of the sound blades of the instrument are associated with two fins, respectively (33) and (34), arranged on either side of the single blade holder (21), these two fins are of cross section tapered taper and their respective longitudinal axes extend in the longitudinal direction of the instrument substantially parallel to the plane Px,
- le premier aileron (33) est disposĆ© Ć  l'intĆ©rieur du canal (220) concernĆ© qu'il traverse de part en part dans le sens longitudinal de l'instrument et son bord d'attaque situĆ© le plus proche de l'embouchure est positionnĆ© sensiblement en face de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame aspirĆ©e (38) correspondante, Ā - The first fin (33) is disposed within the channel (220) concerned that it passes right through the longitudinal direction of the instrument and its leading edge located closest to the mouth is positioned substantially in front of the free end of the corresponding suction blade (38),
- le second aileron (34) est implantĆ© de l'autre cotĆ© du porte-lames unique, donc entre la face extĆ©rieure du porte-lames (21) et la face intĆ©rieure du capot (23) et son bord d'attaque situĆ© le plus proche du pavillon de l'instrument est positionnĆ© sensiblement en face de l'extrĆ©mitĆ© libre de la lame soufflĆ©e (39) correspondante . Ā - The second fin (34) is implanted on the other side of the single blade holder, and therefore between the outer face of the blade holder (21) and the inner face of the hood (23) and its leading edge located the most near the flag of the instrument is positioned substantially opposite the free end of the corresponding blown blade (39).
11 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication 1 caractƩrisƩ en ce qu'il comporte des ouvertures ( 230) amƩnagƩes au travers du capot concernƩ (23) et en ce que lesdites ouvertures sont positionnƩes au niveau de la partie libre oscillante des lames sonores aspirƩes concernƩes . 11 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 1 characterized in that it comprises openings (230) arranged through the cover concerned (23) and in that said openings are positioned at the free oscillating portion of the aspirated sound blades concerned.
12 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication 1 caractƩrisƩ en ce que: 12 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 1 characterized in that:
- il comporte un contre-peigne (8) dont la conicitĆ© des faces est complĆ©mentaire Ć  la conicitĆ© des faces correspondantes du peigne (7) de telle sorte que lesdites faces correspondantes sont donc parallĆØles deux Ć  deux , - It comprises a counter-comb (8) whose conicity of the faces is complementary to the conicity of the corresponding faces of the comb (7) so that said corresponding faces are therefore parallel in pairs,
- chacun des deux porte-lames (4,5) de l'instrument est pris en sandwich entre la face du peigne (7) et la face correspondante du contre-peigne (8) , Ā each of the two blade holders (4,5) of the instrument is sandwiched between the face of the comb (7) and the corresponding face of the counter-comb (8),
- des moyens (9) gƩnƩrant une poussƩe tendant Ơ rapprocher le contre-peigne de la face d'embouchure de l'instrument assurent le placage des porte-lames (4,5) contre le peigne (7). - Means (9) generating a thrust tending to bring the comb against the mouthpiece face of the instrument ensure the veneer of the blade holder (4,5) against the comb (7).
13 - Harmonica (1 ) selon la revendication 1 caractƩrisƩ en ce qu'il comporte deux porte- lames (4,5) et en ce que lorsque l'instrument est en position de jeu, le porte-lames(4) supportant les lames aspirƩes (400) est disposƩ dans la partie supƩrieure de l'instrument tandis que le porte-lames(5) supportant les lames soufflƩes(500) est disposƩ dans la partie infƩrieure de l'instrument . 14 - Harmonica (1) selon la revendication 1 caractƩrisƩ en ce qu'il comporte un dispositif de rƩglage (250,251), directement accessible de l'extƩrieur sans nƩcessiter le dƩmontage de l'instrument, permettant de rƩgler la prƩcontrainte des moyens (252) assurant de rappel automatique en position sortie du distributeur d'air coulissant (25) lorsque le joueur n'appuie pas sur l'extrƩmitƩ dudit distributeur constituant son bouton de commande . 13 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 1 characterized in that it comprises two blade holders (4,5) and in that when the instrument is in play position, the blade holder (4) supporting the blades aspirated (400) is disposed in the upper part of the instrument while the blade holder (5) supporting the blown blades (500) is arranged in the lower part of the instrument. 14 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 1 characterized in that it comprises a control device (250,251), directly accessible from the outside without requiring disassembly of the instrument, for adjusting the preload means (252) ensuring automatic return to the output position of the sliding air distributor (25) when the player does not press on the end of said distributor constituting its control button.
15 - Harmonica (1 ) selon la revendication 1 caractĆ©risĆ© en ce que la hauteur (e1) d'au moins l'une des faces latĆ©rales de la fenĆŖtre aux travers de laquelle oscille la lame la plus grave du porte-lames (4,5) est supĆ©rieure Ć  la hauteur (e4) de la face latĆ©rale correspondante de la fenĆŖtre au travers de laquelle oscille la lame la plus aiguĆ« dudit porte- lames . 15 - Harmonica (1) according to claim 1 characterized in that the height (e1) of at least one of the lateral faces of the window through which oscillates the most serious blade of the blade holder (4,5 ) is greater than the height (e4) of the corresponding lateral face of the window through which oscillates the highest blade of said blade holder.
EP11708523.3A 2010-01-29 2011-01-28 Improvement for a harmonica provided with an air distributor Active EP2529368B1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
FR1000360A FR2955966B1 (en) 2010-01-29 2010-01-29 IMPROVEMENT FOR HARMONICA EQUIPPED WITH AIR DISPENSER
PCT/FR2011/000059 WO2011092407A1 (en) 2010-01-29 2011-01-28 Improvement for a harmonica provided with an air distributor

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP2529368A1 true EP2529368A1 (en) 2012-12-05
EP2529368B1 EP2529368B1 (en) 2017-12-06

Family

ID=42167230

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP11708523.3A Active EP2529368B1 (en) 2010-01-29 2011-01-28 Improvement for a harmonica provided with an air distributor

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP2529368B1 (en)
FR (1) FR2955966B1 (en)
WO (1) WO2011092407A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, ā€  Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111341288A (en) * 2018-12-19 2020-06-26 安äø–äŗšå¤Ŗē§‘ęŠ€č‚”ä»½ęœ‰é™å…¬åø Micro flute mouth organ and manufacturing method thereof

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, ā€  Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR912714A (en) * 1942-06-25 1946-08-19 Internat Plastic Harmonica Cor Improvements to chromatic harmonicas
US2467761A (en) * 1947-04-30 1949-04-19 Reconstruction Finance Corp Plastic chromatic harmonica
US2595316A (en) * 1948-07-13 1952-05-06 Charles E Wetzler Reed operated musical instrument
US3580125A (en) * 1969-04-04 1971-05-25 Oliver W Heatwole Key-adjustable harmonica
US3757025A (en) * 1971-12-13 1973-09-04 C Huang Harmonicas
JPS5857899U (en) * 1981-10-15 1983-04-19 ę Ŗ式会ē¤¾éˆ“ęœØę„½å™Øč£½ä½œę‰€ chromatic double note harmonica
FR2910166B1 (en) * 2006-12-14 2016-02-12 Jean Claude Bibollet IMPROVEMENT FOR HARMONICA.

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, ā€  Cited by third party
Title
See references of WO2011092407A1 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2529368B1 (en) 2017-12-06
WO2011092407A1 (en) 2011-08-04
FR2955966A1 (en) 2011-08-05
FR2955966B1 (en) 2016-02-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2561507B1 (en) Improvement for a harmonica
EP1461803A1 (en) Lip element for instrument with flapping reed
WO2008087297A2 (en) Improvement to harmonica
EP2529368B1 (en) Improvement for a harmonica provided with an air distributor
FR2880812A1 (en) TABLE TENNIS RACKET
FR2983415A1 (en) SLIDING BOARD STRUCTURE ELEMENT ON SNOW, AND SLIDING BOARD INCORPORATING SUCH ELEMENT
EP1964105B1 (en) Improvement for a harmonica
WO2014013197A2 (en) Badminton shuttlecock
FR3093224A1 (en) Single reed wind instrument mouthpiece with one or more dividing walls
EP3226236B1 (en) Improvement for accordion
FR2880813A1 (en) Table tennis racket, has covering connected to plastic core by over molding/co-molding, where covering has upper surface in which cells emerge, where shape and distribution of cells are regular
EP3188961B1 (en) Surfboard fin having a rearwardly offset bearing surface
FR2778778A1 (en) DEVICE FOR HOLDING AND CLAMPING A DOUBLE REED AND MUSIC INSTRUMENT COMPRISING SUCH A REED
EP1795266A1 (en) Process and blowing nozzle for blowing dust from alveolar plates
EP1902946B1 (en) Light aircraft, comprising improved wings
FR2938108A1 (en) Sliding cross flute for use by left-handed flutist, has piston sliding inside cylindrical body that includes mouthpiece with hole, where body includes rigid cylindrical lateral wall closed by rigid topper and rigid base with opening
FR2616574A1 (en) Musical wind instrument
FR2834815A1 (en) Mouthpiece for musical instrument comprises spout connected at one end to tail having internal bore, and has elliptical interior and exterior contours
FR2889346A1 (en) Mute for e.g. saxophone, has three parts with respective active elements, made of elastically deformable flexible material, complementary to shape of and placed correspondingly in mouthpiece, crook and bell of saxophone
WO1991017538A1 (en) Mouth piece for a wind instrument of the brass family, and instrument provided with such mouth piece
WO2013093367A1 (en) Plectrum for a string instrument
FR2466823A1 (en) RECORDER
EP1209072A1 (en) Keel of a boat with a bulging end
FR2926470A1 (en) TABLE TENNIS RACKET
FR3054919A1 (en) WIND MUSIC INSTRUMENT WITH FREE REEDS AND HIGH MODULAR HEIGHT

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20120820

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR

DAX Request for extension of the european patent (deleted)
17Q First examination report despatched

Effective date: 20141114

GRAP Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1

INTG Intention to grant announced

Effective date: 20170712

GRAS Grant fee paid

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3

GRAA (expected) grant

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: B1

Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: GB

Ref legal event code: FG4D

Free format text: NOT ENGLISH

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: AT

Ref legal event code: REF

Ref document number: 953051

Country of ref document: AT

Kind code of ref document: T

Effective date: 20171215

Ref country code: CH

Ref legal event code: EP

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: IE

Ref legal event code: FG4D

Free format text: LANGUAGE OF EP DOCUMENT: FRENCH

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: R096

Ref document number: 602011043934

Country of ref document: DE

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: FR

Ref legal event code: PLFP

Year of fee payment: 8

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: NL

Ref legal event code: MP

Effective date: 20171206

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: LT

Ref legal event code: MG4D

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: ES

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: NO

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20180306

Ref country code: FI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: LT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: SE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: AT

Ref legal event code: MK05

Ref document number: 953051

Country of ref document: AT

Kind code of ref document: T

Effective date: 20171206

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: RS

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: LV

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: HR

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: GR

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20180307

Ref country code: BG

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20180306

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: NL

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: EE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: SK

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: CZ

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: SM

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: PL

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: AT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: IT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: RO

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: CH

Ref legal event code: PL

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: R097

Ref document number: 602011043934

Country of ref document: DE

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: MC

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: MT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

PLBE No opposition filed within time limit

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009261

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: NO OPPOSITION FILED WITHIN TIME LIMIT

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: LU

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20180128

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: IE

Ref legal event code: MM4A

26N No opposition filed

Effective date: 20180907

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: SI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: DK

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: CH

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20180131

Ref country code: LI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20180131

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: IE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20180128

PGFP Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: BE

Payment date: 20190722

Year of fee payment: 9

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: TR

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: HU

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT; INVALID AB INITIO

Effective date: 20110128

Ref country code: PT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: CY

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: MK

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20171206

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: AL

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20171206

Ref country code: IS

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20180406

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: BE

Ref legal event code: MM

Effective date: 20200131

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: BE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20200131

PGFP Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: FR

Payment date: 20230127

Year of fee payment: 13

PGFP Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: DE

Payment date: 20240126

Year of fee payment: 14

Ref country code: GB

Payment date: 20240125

Year of fee payment: 14